SAP Treasury - Risk Management

)6&Basic functions of 6$37UHDVXU\DQG5LVN
0DQDJPHQW
)6&
%DVLFIXQFWLRQVRI 6$37UHDVXU\DQG5LVN
0DQDJPHQW

 SAP AG©2003
SAP AG 2003

SAP R/3 Enterprise, Extension Set 1.10

2003/Q3

Material number: 50067688
&RS\ULJKW
&RS\ULJKW6$3$*$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHG
1RSDUWRIWKLVSXEOLFDWLRQPD\EHUHSURGXFHGRU WUDQVPLWWHGLQ
DQ\IRUPRUIRUDQ\SXUSRVHZLWKRXWWKHH[SUHVVSHUPLVVLRQRI
6$3$*7KHLQIRUPDWLRQFRQWDLQHGKHUHLQPD\EHFKDQJHG
ZLWKRXWSULRUQRWLFH
$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHG
 SAP AG 2003

7UDGHPDUNV

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software
components of other software vendors.

Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

IBM®, DB2®, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA, AIX®, S/390®,
AS/400®, OS/390®, OS/400®, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner,
WebSphere®, Netfinity®, Tivoli®, Informix and Informix® Dynamic ServerTM are trademarks of IBM
Corporation in USA and/or other countries.

ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.

UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®, VideoFrame®,
MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.

HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web
Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology
invented and implemented by Netscape.

MarketSet and Enterprise Buyer are jointly owned trademarks of SAP AG and Commerce One.

SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein
as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in
several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the
trademarks of their respective companies.
P\6$3)LQDQFLDOV)6&0&XUULFXOXP
! ;CB HN@ =9 2 ACBC q @<=9 2 A?<C!C q @=9 2 A?<CB ?y@ =9 2
c}x_~Uw VWc r ] ZYkZ\V] kl UVVWYXZ\[R] Z_^ w k\x\coiZ\[kZem:mX\ZZ] Z_^
UVVWXZ\[s] Z_ôkZ\m ` X\ab[MWc:] de] Z_^fYg\hiZYijGkl ujvW^jvkcon
ij ] i\ t iuYWjv[1] Z_^ l imîj)n ` X\ab[)Wcoij#a\n VWjGjGiYa_u\WZemiZYV\in
z{z z{z piZYm\Wj#a z|z ] Z\[MijviYab[ z|z
!#" ?8@=9 2 ABCC H8@=9 2 AC q Hy@=9 2 AB!BB q @ =9 2
$&%'!()% * '+-,./10' $L%'!(G% * '+-,<.!; A= 2 0 S = 6 =T!'!7'6/ '>4<(s* /1* ' 2
2 ,!3 4/5* ,!687:9; <* 6<=6>* =!34 Q Q 3 9 z{z S =!6=!T<'!7N'!6/
<* 6=6>* =!3 2 z5z A0=* 6 S =!6= T!' 7'6/ z{z z|z
AB!B\C H8@=9 2
AL q< C ? @=9 2
8 A&B B? O8@=9 2
I= 2 * >N.M46 ></{* , 6 2 ,<. S , 6'9 S =!(M<'/5
IKEI4 2 * 6' 22 K=</s= ;8(M'<= 2 4 (G9N= 6@ ,(M'<8=!6@
,<,!3 2 ' / * 2 S =<6<=T!' 7N'!6</ z{z K' (s* %= /5* %' 2 z|z
5z
?!H<C q @ =9 2 AB? C ? @<=9 2

8 K IA BK=9
I = 6!8A4 2 s/ , 7N'!(
!;D6EGF&, 4 2 '8A = 2 0 JI* 3 3 ' (
&><>!, 4 6/ 2 z5 A, 6 2 ,!3* @<=</s, (
z{z
A S: CC q @<=9 2 A&BH<C ?N@<=9 2
w<jvWViYaeaeiYa}] Z~ ;
JI* 3 3 ' (LK* (M'<></
z5 z{z
&?<O<C q @ =9 2 ABO<C ?8@=9 2
` W Z\[Rj)k_VY[!UVVYWX\Z\[Ga
t iVi] kl iokZYm PK* 2Q 4/R'
wk\x_kYl i S = 6=!T<'!7N'!6/
z5
 SAP AG 2003

&RXUVH3UHUHTXLVLWHV
z 5HFRPPHQGHG
)6&Overview of SAP Financial Supply Management

(FSCM)
 SAP AG 2003

7DUJHW*URXS
z $XGLHQFH

Members of the project team

System staff

Organization staff
z 'XUDWLRQGD\V
 SAP AG 2001

1RWHVWRWKHXVHU

The training materials are not teach-yourself programs. They complement the course instructor’s
explanations. On the sheets there is space for you to write down additional information.

The exercises are merely intended to supplement and reinforce the examples dealt with in the
course. There may not be time to cover all the exercises during the course itself. If this is the case,
you can use the exercises after the course to consolidate your knowledge.
&RXUVH2YHUYLHZ
&RQWHQWV
z Course goals
z Course objectives
z Course content
z Course overview diagram
z Main business scenario
 SAP AG 2001

© SAP AG FSC110 1-1

&RXUVH*RDOV
7KLVFRXUVHZLOOSUHSDUH\RXWR
z Identify the basic functions in Corporate Finance
Management that are common to all the
subcomponents
z Configure banks and business partners and explain
the concepts behind the transaction and position
management process in Corporate Finance
Management
 SAP AG 2001


&RXUVH2EMHFWLYHV
$WWKHFRQFOXVLRQRIWKLVFRXUVH\RXZLOOEHDEOHWR
z Set up organizational units in the SAP System
z Create and configure banks and business partners

z Make the system settings needed to control internal
processing
z Describe and configure the payment program for
payment requests
 SAP AG 2001


&RXUVH&RQWHQW
3UHIDFH
Unit 1 &RXUVH2YHUYLHZ Unit 7 7UDQVDFWLRQDQG3RVLWLRQ

0DQDJHPHQW6WUXFWXUH
Unit 2 2YHUYLHZRI&RUSRUDWH
)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQW Unit 8 7UDQVDFWLRQDQG3RVLWLRQ
0DQDJHPHQW3URFHVV
Unit 3 2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
Unit 9 3D\PHQW3URJUDPIRU
Unit 4 %XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV 3D\PHQW5HTXHVWV
Unit 5 %DQNV Unit 10 0DUNHW'DWD0DQDJHPHQW
Unit 6 7UDQVDFWLRQDQG3RVLWLRQ Unit 11 ,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
0DQDJHPHQW3UHSDUDWLRQ
 SAP AG 2001


&RXUVH2YHUYLHZ'LDJUDP
2YHUYLHZRI&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQW
2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
%DQNV
7UDQVDFWLRQDQG3RVLWLRQ0DQDJHPHQW3UHSDUDWLRQ
7UDQVDFWLRQDQG3RVLWLRQ0DQDJHPHQW6WUXFWXUH
7UDQVDFWLRQDQG3RVLWLRQ0DQDJHPHQW3URFHVV
3D\PHQW3URJUDPIRU3D\PHQW5HTXHVWV
0DUNHW'DWD0DQDJHPHQW
,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


0DLQ%XVLQHVV6FHQDULR
z You are using (or have successfully installed) the

SAP Financial Accounting solution, and want to
implement SAP Corporate Finance Management
(CFM).
z You begin by making the basic settings in SAP
CFM.
 SAP AG 2001

You are a member of a project team. Your task is to make the basic settings in Corporate Finance
Management, including the settings for mapping financial transactions.

6HOHFWLRQRIILQDQFLDOLQVWUXPHQWV
,GHQWLILFDWLRQRISURFHVVHV
2YHUYLHZRIIXQFWLRQV
2YHUYLHZRIWKHEDVLFIXQFWLRQVLQ
&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQW
 SAP AG 2001

The course FS110 covers the basic functions in the Corporate Finance Management system, in particular
the functions that are common to all the subcomponents of the Transaction Manager (money market,
forex, derivatives and securities). The focus is on general transaction and position management concepts
and the corresponding Customizing options.
SAP recommends that you also visit course FS100 "Corporate Finance Management (CFM) Overview".

8QLW2EMHFWLYHV
$WWKHFRQFOXVLRQRIWKLVXQLW\RXZLOOEHDEOHWR
z Provide an overview of SAP Corporate Finance

Management
z State the relevant product types
z Explain the various processes, standard functions

and basic functions in Corporate Finance
Management
 SAP AG 2001


2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
%DQNV
,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


%XVLQHVV6FHQDULR
z Before you begin working in the project team, you

want to gain an overview of SAP Corporate Finance
Management (CFM).
z Which products and processes can be mapped
using the new Corporate Finance Management
solution? What functions are available?
z Which functions form the basis for mapping
financial transactions?
 SAP AG 2001


³&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQWHQDEOHV
WUHDVXUHUVDQGILQDQFHPDQDJHUVWR
DQDO\]HRSWLPL]HDQGFRQWURO
WKHLUEXVLQHVVGHFLVLRQVDWDJOREDO
HQWHUSULVHOHYHO´
/LTXLGLW\3ODQQHU ,Q+RXVH&DVK
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHU 3RUWIROLR$QDO\]HU
0DUNHW5LVN$QDO\]HU &UHGLW5LVN$QDO\]HU
 SAP AG 2001

The aim of SAP &RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQW(&)0) is to support finance divisions in a wide range

of industries by offering the latest tools and business solutions for performing their various tasks.
SAP Corporate Finance Management is based on a series of components geared towards analyzing and
optimizing the business processes in the finance area of a company. Altogether there are six components,
which include existing SAP applications and new ones developed specifically for the CFM solution.

/LTXLGLW\3ODQQHU
&KDUDFWHULVWLFV
&RPSDQ\ZLGHSODQQLQJ

z

HQYLURQPHQWEDVHGRQWHPSODWHV Centralized &
decentralized
data entry

3ODQQLQJFDWHJRULHVDQGPDVWHUGDWD

3HULRGPRQLWRU Planning

framework
Cash flow-related planning
z 3ODQQLQJVKHHWIRUGHFHQWUDOL]HG
per planning category
per period
GDWDPDQDJHPHQW Mapping &
assignment
per currency
z 0HFKDQLVPVWRDJJUHJDWHSODQQLQJ
GDWDLQDFRUSRUDWHJURXS Operational data
5DSSOLFDWLRQV
z $JJUHJDWLRQDQGFRPSDULVRQZLWK
FXUUHQWGDWD
 SAP AG 2002

Financial planning plays an increasingly important role in corporate management, particularly in highly
diversified, decentralized, international companies. You need to be able to forecast and respond to key
figures in advance, and be in a position to control the allocation of financial resources, recognize
liquidity deficits or surpluses in plenty of time, and identify expected foreign currency positions in the
planning period.
However, recording planning data on a timely basis and adapting it as soon as circumstances change
often poses a considerable problem. This is because the processes for capturing the data are generally
decentralized and linked to other planning processes, such as those for sales or procurement. As a result,
the financial planning activities often fail to give an indication of future trends.
The goal of the Liquidity Planner is to circumvent these obstacles by offering tools to enter, aggregate
and evaluate financial planning data. The main focus is on providing tools that are easy to use, and on
making up-to-date information available for financial analysis and optimization. In addition, the
Liquidity Planner lets you extend the planning horizon further into the future, giving you the opportunity
to influence expected cash flows, rather than just react to them.

,Q+RXVH&DVK
*URXS
+HDGRIILFH
&RPSDQ\ ,Q+RXVH&DVK ),
&HQWHU
&RPSDQ\
&RPSDQ\ $FFRXQW
PDQDJHPHQW
!#"%$&('*)+&-,. /10
+,3254#" 67,*8:9#";,<"-4.54#"
2EMHFWLYHV
z 6XSSRUWGLIIHUHQWJURXSVWUXFWXUHVWKDWDUHVXEMHFWWRFKDQJH
z &RRUGLQDWHSD\PHQWWUDQVDFWLRQVDWDUHJLRQDODQGJOREDOOHYHO
z &RVWHIIHFWLYHPDQDJHPHQWRILQWHUQDODQGH[WHUQDOSD\PHQWWUDQVDFWLRQV
z 6WDQGDUGL]HDQGDXWRPDWHEXVLQHVVSURFHVVHV
z 5HGXFHWKHQXPEHURIH[WHUQDOEDQNDFFRXQWVRSWLPL]HFURVVERUGHUSD\PHQWV
 SAP AG 2002

The In-House Cash component allows companies that operate globally to manage their intra-group and
external payment transactions more efficiently. This is achieved by setting up an In-House Cash Center
at the group headquarters, which is then used to process all the payments between the individual
corporate entities.
The In-House Cash Center is a virtual bank with which the subsidiaries keep current accounts. This
enables you to keep cash resources within the group and optimize how they are applied. At the same
time, it means you need fewer external bank accounts and stand to make considerable savings when you
process international payments.
The In-House Cash solution also gives you greater flexibility with regard to payment netting.

7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHU
7UDQVDFWLRQ
0DQDJHU
HI9J9J4<"+5,J,J)4.54#"
'+&()F,*K LM,<"(K '+
Money
Money market
market N&O4#,<9*P*&-2#QSRUTV
'&;),K L,<"WK '+
Front
Front
Forex
Forex office
office
Middle
Middle
office
office
Securities
Securities
Back
Back
office
office
===
E @1G
F
Derivatives
Derivatives >#?A@CBCB7D
 SAP AG 2001

A core task in many finance departments is concluding financial transactions. Depending on the
company policy, the emphasis can either be on providing an internal service for the affiliated group
companies, or participating actively in the financial markets in order to invest liquid assets, finance
planned investments, or hedge existing risks.
The Transaction Manager offers tools for processing these transactions at the various stages, from deal
capture right through to the transfer of the relevant data to Financial Accounting. It has been designed to
support the requirements of both traditional treasury departments, which tend to focus more strongly on
trading, and those of asset management departments. The advantage of this approach is that all types of
transaction can be processed using the same platform – from short-term financing to strategic long-term
investments.

3RUWIROLR$QDO\]HU
6HWXSRUJDQL]DWLRQDO
,QYHVWPHQWVWUDWHJ\ VWUXFWXUHV
$VVHWDOORFDWLRQ
LQJ
'HILQHEHQFKPDUN
,P
SOH
QQ 7UDQVDFWLRQSURFHVVLQJ
3OD XZY
PH
QWD
W
5HSRUWLQJDQGDXGLW
5LVNDGMXVWPHQW
0HDVXUHPHQW
$WWULEXWLRQ
%HQFKPDUNLQJ
3HUIRUPDQFHPHDVXUHPHQW
3RUWIROLR$QDO\]HU
 SAP AG 2001

The 3RUWIROLR$QDO\]HU can be used to assess how well an investment has performed, for example in
relation to benchmarks.

0DUNHW5LVN$QDO\]HU
&XUUHQF\ULVN
&XUUHQF\ULVN ,QWHUHVWUDWHULVN
,QWHUHVWUDWHULVN 6WRFNULVN
6WRFNULVN
0DUNHWULVNSURFHGXUHV 2UJDQL]DWLRQDOHOHPHQWV
&DVKIORZDQDO\VLV 5HSRUWLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
9DOXHDWULVN 6WUXFWXUHGSURGXFWV
6HQVLWLYLWLHV )OH[LEOHSRUWIROLRKLHUDUFKLHV
0DUNWRPDUNHW %XVLQHVVDUHDV
,QWHUHVWFXUUHQF\H[SRVXUH
'HFLVLRQVXSSRUWDQGVLPXODWLRQ
)LFWLWLRXVWUDQVDFWLRQV
0DUNHWGDWDVFHQDULRV
 SAP AG 2002

Alongside traditional finance management tasks such as cash management and liquidity assurance,
effective market risk management is a decisive factor in securing your company’s competitive position.
The Market Risk Analyzer offers comprehensive position analysis functions, such as mark-to-market
valuation for financial transactions, as well as tools for calculating risk and return figures, including
exposure, internal rate of return, sensitivity and value at risk.
When you run these reports, you can incorporate both contracted positions and fictitious financial
transactions in the calculations, and use actual or simulated market prices as a basis for valuation. Highly
flexible report configuration options round off the functional scope to give you a reliable evaluation
basis for market risk control.

&UHGLW5LVN$QDO\]HU
R:
R:T*T*Vh
VfN
N&-&O,*,#9#9JJ,J,J\3\3"i"WK K '+'+jV
5Vgg,,J,J,JJ)F)F44& &
d*K !K " bAc R['+.\F]^P._4A"(&;,#9J,J\3"K '+`

P*$J_,<";45]^K aK "-9
&KDUDFWHULVWLFV
\FeJ4J\F8
z ,QWHJUDWHGRQOLQHOLPLWFKHFN &UHGLW5LVN
z $QDO\VLVPHDVXUHPHQWDQG $QDO\]HU
FRQWURORIFUHGLWULVNVDQG
VHWWOHPHQWULVNV
z ([SRVXUHVFDQEHDWWULEXWHG
WROLPLWVFRPSDQ\ZLGH
5HSRUWLQJ
z )OH[LEOHIRUPXODVDUH .Jqs;Mr.q k#lm3n#o.p.qsr |.} ~} 7.po<rM^} ~} *i } } u
DYDLODEOHIRUFDOFXODWLQJWKH kp.qSn+J. tJu v z<u v y#u t #u
M
GHIDXOWULVNH[SRVXUHV 7.} Sr<+#. wx3yJu x M#u w3tJu #u x
M
Jq; On* wt3tJu z zw#u y3tJu w w#u
M
z 1HWWLQJDQGFROODWHUDO 7q;} W } <r z{yJu x ut u v y3M v w#u x
 SAP AG 2001

Stricter regulations governing risk control underline the growing importance of monitoring insolvency
risk and keeping it within acceptable limits. It also makes business sense to have system support for
measuring, analyzing and managing default risks.
The Credit Risk Analyzer addresses these requirements and aims to provide a comprehensive tool for
controlling counterparty and issuer default risks. In the first phase, functions are being developed for
dealing with the specific risks associated with your financial transactions. Later stages will involve
integrating the sales and receivables accounting areas. As a result, managers will be in a position to
identify counterparty/issuer default risks as they occur and act accordingly.

6XPPDU\
&RUSRUDWH+HDGTXDUWHUV±
&RUSRUDWH+HDGTXDUWHUV±7UHDVXU\
H§J,] 2JL4&\#'!$J'+J4#"s9
^ i²{ »F ^¸(W
·3 ¸ ·3 ¸ ¼ ½^
¹.
Wº( ¹J
º; ¹.
º(
ï ii i©( W¡ Á ; <O W

#i ¥OO ¢ Money Securities
Foreign
Derivatives ¢(£;¢ i
market exchange
N&;,#9J,J\<"WK 'CjV¾,J,J)4*&
³^FÓµ1'+P#9J4R¶,<9*e dK ¿CP*K _+K "S2a%] ,#4&

¤i ¥ ¢ R[,<9*e5V§,#,J)4.54#" ¨W ii i©( i¡
Â{©;©(ÃW ( WÄ
ª «¬ ¬¯ ;® ª «¬ ¬¯ ;® ª «¬ ¬¯ ;®

; 3 ¤W W¥
Wi( O ;i¡ ° ± ² ¦(; ° ± ² À
° ± ² C ¢O£;¢ W ¢
 SAP AG 2001


6HOHFWLRQRI)LQDQFLDO,QVWUXPHQWV
3URGXFWW\SHV
,QYHVWPHQWERUURZLQJ
LQVWUXPHQWV +HGJLQJLQVWUXPHQWV
0RQH\PDUNHW 6HFXULWLHV )RUH[ 'HULYDWLYHV

Å 7LPHGHSRVLWV Å 6WRFNV Å )RUH[VSRW Å &DSVIORRUV
Å 'HSRVLWVDW Å 6XEVFULSWLRQ WUDQVDFWLRQV Å )5$V
QRWLFH ULJKWV Å )RUZDUG Å 6ZDSV
Å &RPPHUFLDO Å ,QYHVWPHQW H[FKDQJH ,QWHUHVWUDWH
3DSHU FHUWLILFDWHV WUDQVDFWLRQV &XUUHQF\
Å &DVKIORZ Å %RQGV Å )RUH[VZDSV Å 27&RSWLRQV
WUDQVDFWLRQV Å &RQYHUWLEOH &XUUHQF\
Å ,QWHUHVWUDWH ERQGV ,QWHUHVWUDWH
LQVWUXPHQWV Å :DUUDQWERQGV 6HFXULWLHV
Å )DFLOLWLHV Å :DUUDQWV 6ZDSWLRQV,5*V
Å )XWXUHV
 SAP AG 2001

You can smooth out short-term liquidity deficits and surpluses using PRQH\PDUNHWRUIRUHLJQ
H[FKDQJHWUDQVDFWLRQV. In the money market area, for example, you can use FDVKIORZWUDQVDFWLRQV to
enter a broad range of transactions. This function allows you to enter the term and the cash flows
manually. The cash flows reflect the structure of the transaction in question, and can stem from
payments, expenses, revenues and changes to the position.
You can manage VHFXULWLHVWUDQVDFWLRQV for your investments in the medium to long term.
'HULYDWLYHILQDQFLDOLQVWUXPHQWVallow you to hedge against interest rate and currency risks.

3URFHVVHVLQ&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQW
(DUQLQJV
5LVNWDUJHWV )HHGEDFN
5HYLVLRQRI $GMXVWPHQWV
SODQQHGWDUJHWV
$QDO\VLV 'HFLVLRQ
SODQQLQJ
SODQQLQJ
)LQDQFLDO
$QDO\VLVDQG
WUDGLQJSURFHVV WUDQVDFWLRQV
7UDQVDFWLRQDQGSRVLWLRQ
PDQDJHPHQWSURFHVV
'RFXPHQWDWLRQDQGFRQWUROIXQFWLRQV
 SAP AG 2001

From a strategic point of view, the analysis and trading process is the starting point for the various CFM
processes. At this stage, you identify and analyze the liquidity and risk positions on the basis of the risk
and earnings targets you have defined. The SAP System provides special tools and methods with which
you can perform an integrated analysis of your company’s financial and risk situation.
Once you have decided to conclude certain financial transactions, you enter the trading processes for
these transactions in the Transaction Manager. The Transaction Manager also supports back office and
accounting functions for managing transactions and the related financial positions later on.
A range of documentation and control functions are available for all CFM activities. They allow you to
perform evaluations for specific instruments or groups of instruments at each stage of the process. This
fulfills the various documentation and control requirements for both financial accounting and corporate
finance management.

5HOHDVH
7UDGLQJ %DFNRIILFH $FFRXQWLQJ
Æ &UHDWHQHZRIIHU Æ 6HWWOHPHQWFRQWURO Æ 3RVWLQJV

Æ ,QWHUHVWUDWHDGMXVWPHQW Æ 3D\PHQW
RUGHUFRQWUDFW
Æ ([HUFLVHH[SLUDWLRQ Æ 1HWWLQJ WUDQVDFWLRQV
Æ 7HUPLQDWLRQV Æ 5HIHUHQFLQJ Æ 5HYHUVDOV
Æ 5ROORYHUV Æ &RQILUPDWLRQOHWWHUV Æ $FFUXDOVGHIHUUDOV
Æ ([HUFLVLQJULJKWV Æ 6HFXULWLHVDFFRXQWWUDQVIHUV Æ 9DOXDWLRQ
Æ &RUSRUDWHDFWLRQV
8VHUDXWKRUL]DWLRQ
/LPLWPDQDJHPHQW
 SAP AG 2001

The transaction and position management process is divided into the following areas:
The WUDGLQJ area comprises functions for entering transactions and exercising rights.
In the EDFNRIILFH area, the transactions are settled (checked). The back office also covers processes
related to position management, such as securities account transfers.
In the DFFRXQWLQJ area, you make the postings for the various activities to the subledger. From here, the
posting information is transferred to the FI general ledger.
The basic structure of the trading and transaction management processes is the same across all the SAP
CFM components. This forms the basis for integrating and processing transactions within the SAP
System and provides the framework for adapting the way transactions are represented in the system to
suit company-specific requirements.
You can authorize different users for different activities in the transaction and position management
process. This allows you to separate trading, back office and accounting functions by employee.
In addition, the limit management function enables you to assign a range of different limit amounts to
different transactions.
You can configure the system to require transactions to be released for posting by one or several
(different) person(s).

)XQFWLRQ2YHUYLHZ
z &RPSOHWHILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQDQGSRVLWLRQPDQDJHPHQW
6XSSRUWRIWUDGLQJDQGEDFNRIILFHIXQFWLRQV
Ç
)XQFWLRQVWRPRQLWRUFKHFNDQGUHOHDVHWUDQVDFWLRQV
Ç
'DWDWUDQVIHUWR)LQDQFLDO$FFRXQWLQJ
Ç
LQFOXGLQJDFFUXDOGHIHUUDODQGYDOXDWLRQ
z )OH[LEOHVHWWLQJVIRUFRPSDQ\VSHFLILFWUDQVDFWLRQDQG
SRVLWLRQPDQDJHPHQWSURFHVVHV
z )LQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQVDVVLJQHGWRSRUWIROLRVRUPDQDJHGLQ
VHFXULWLHVDFFRXQWV
z )OH[LEOHUHSRUWLQJDQGSRUWIROLRDQDO\VLV
z 'DWDIHHGLQWHUIDFH
 SAP AG 2001


%DVLF)XQFWLRQVLQWKH7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHU
T*³
6WUXFWXUHRIWKHILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQV
&HQWUDOGDWD
)LQDQFLDO ([DPSOHV%XVLQHVVSDUWQHUVEDQNV
$FFRXQWLQJ
Hg
ÈV
0RQH\PDUNHW 'HULYDWLYHV
$VVHW )RUHLJQH[FKDQJH 6HFXULWLHV
$FFRXQWLQJ
R b
&RQWUROOLQJ &HQWUDOIXQFWLRQV
([DPSOHV7UDGHUXVHUFXUUHQFLHVFRUUHVSRQGHQFH
ILQDQFLDOPDWKHPDWLFVSRVWLQJORJLFSD\PHQWWUDQVDFWLRQV
ZRUNIORZDUFKLYLQJPDUNHWGDWDLQIRUPDWLRQV\VWHP
 SAP AG 2002


8QLW6XPPDU\
z Corporate Finance Management covers the components

/LTXLGLW\3ODQQHU,Q+RXVH&DVK
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHU3RUWIROLR$QDO\]HU0DUNHW
5LVN$QDO\]HUand&UHGLW5LVN$QDO\]HU
z In the Transaction Manager, financial transactions can
be mapped using various processes.
z The functions provided by SAP CFM support the
complete transaction management process, from the
trading stage through to the back office and financial
accounting. The solution also offers reporting and
analysis functions and a datafeed interface.
 SAP AG 2001


'DWD8VHGLQWKH([HUFLVHV
([SODQDWLRQRIWKHV\PEROVXVHGLQWKHH[HUFLVHVDQGVROXWLRQV
([HUFLVHV
6ROXWLRQV
8QLW2EMHFWLYHV
%XVLQHVV6FHQDULR
+LQWVDQG7LSV
:DUQLQJRU&DXWLRQ
'DWDXVHGLQWKHH[HUFLVHV
Data Data in the training Data in the IDES system
system
Company codes TR00 to TR20 1000
G/L accounts 113100, 113105, 113113 113100, 113105, 113113

113913, 118888 118888
Treasury business DEUBA – Deutsche Bank 1000 – Deutsche Bank
partner CITI – Citibank broker
CM groupings BANKEN BANKEN
(Bank account history) (Bank account history)
BANK-IST BANK-IST
(Status of available bank accounts) (Status of available bank accounts)
PERSONEN PERSONEN
(Customers, vendors, and clearing (Customers, vendors, and clearing
accounts) accounts)
GESAMT GESAMT
(Total display) (Total display)
Notes on the exercises:
Create your transactions in UNI, EUR, CHF or USD. Exchange rates have only been maintained
for these currencies.
Do not delete any existing Customizing entries. You should only add new entries.

2YHUYLHZRI&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQW ([HUFLVHV
8QLW2YHUYLHZRI&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQW

• CFM application
• Relevant product types
You want to gain an overview of the SAP Corporate Finance

Management solution.
1-1 Log on to the system with your user TREA-XX.
XX = your group number = your PC number
1-2 Browse through the various menu items in the CFM DSSOLFDWLRQ to get an overview of
the different functions.
1-3 Familiarize yourself with the structure of the &XVWRPL]LQJsettings.

6ROXWLRQV
8QLW2YHUYLHZRI&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQW

1-1 /RJRQWRWKHV\VWHPZLWK\RXUXVHU75($;;<RXULQVWUXFWRUZLOOWHOO\RX
ZKLFKV\VWHPWRXVH0DNHVXUHWKDW\RXXVHWKHFRUUHFWFOLHQWDQGLQIRUPWKH
RWKHUSHUVRQLQ\RXUJURXSRIWKHQHZSDVVZRUG
1-2 Overview of the various functions
Ö$FFRXQWLQJÖ&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQWÖ%DVLF)XQFWLRQV,Q+RXVH
&DVK7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHU0DUNHW5LVN$QDO\]HU&UHGLW5LVN$QDO\]HU
3RUWIROLR$QDO\]HU

Ö$FFRXQWLQJÖ&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQWÖ7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHUÖ
*HQHUDO)XQFWLRQV0RQH\0DUNHW)RUHLJQ([FKDQJH6HFXULWLHV'HULYDWLYHV
1-3 Overview of Customizing
Ö7RROVÖ$FFHOHUDWHG6$3Ö&XVWRPL]LQJÖ(GLW3URMHFWÖ%XWWRQ6$3
5HIHUHQFH,0*Ö&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQW

2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
&RQWHQWV
z SAP in your company
z Client and company code
z Portfolio and securities account
z Users and traders
 SAP AG 2001


2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV8QLW2EMHFWLYHV
z Explain the relationship between the Customizing

settings and the application
z Identify the organizational units in SAP CFM
z Configure trader and user data
 SAP AG 2001


2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
%DQNV
,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV%XVLQHVV6FHQDULR
z <RXZDQWWRJDLQDQRYHUYLHZRIWKHRUJDQL]DWLRQDO
XQLWVLQ6$3&)0DQGDQVZHUWKHIROORZLQJTXHVWLRQV
z +RZGRWKH&XVWRPL]LQJVHWWLQJVDIIHFWKRZWKH
DSSOLFDWLRQZRUNVLQWKHSURGXFWLYHV\VWHP"
z :KDWRSWLRQVDUHDYDLODEOHIRUPDQDJLQJILQDQFLDO
SRVLWLRQV"
z +RZFDQ,HQVXUHWKDWWKHWUDGHUGDWDLVDVVLJQHG
WRWKHFRUUHFWXVHUVDQGVWRUHGZLWKWKHLQGLYLGXDO
ILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQV"
 SAP AG 2001


6$3LQ<RXU&RPSDQ\
5HTXLUHPHQWV
5
&XVWRPL]LQJ
$SSOLFDWLRQ
&RPSDQ\
 SAP AG 2001

&XVWRPL]LQJ is the term used to describe the process of adapting the standard settings delivered with the
system to suit company-specific requirements.
Customizing settings determine the options in the DSSOLFDWLRQ. For example, you may only want to
permit certain entries, or allow users to perform specific activities.
You usually customize the system RQFH when you go live with the SAP system. You can make any
Customizing settings you require for day-to-day business (but which are not vital to system operations)
using application functions.

2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
3RUWIROLR
&RPSDQ\FRGH
6HFXULWLHV
&OLHQW %XVLQHVVDUHD DFFRXQW
&RQWUROOLQJDUHD
 SAP AG 2001

The CFM modules use the central SAP organizational structures. This ensures that the CFM system is
integrated with the other SAP applications.
The FOLHQW is a self-contained unit within the SAP system (commercially, organizationally, and
technically) with separate master records and its own set of tables. Client data applies for all company
codes and organizational structures. The client usually represents the corporate group level.
A FRPSDQ\FRGH (FI) is the smallest organizational unit for which a complete, self-contained set of
accounts can be drawn up for external reporting. The company code is the unit for which you record all
the posting activities and generate all the documents for financial statements (balance sheet, profit and
loss account).
A client can have several company codes, which enables you to manage the accounts for several
independent companies at the same time.
%XVLQHVVDUHDV (FI) are organizational units for internal financial accounting. They are used to group G/L
transaction figures for internal evaluations (internal balance sheet/P&L). You can define business areas
across several company codes.
&RQWUROOLQJDUHDV(CO) are organizational units within an enterprise for which you can perform
comprehensive cost accounting.
You can make further subdivisions in SAP CFM by defining specific evaluation groups, such as
portfolios and securities accounts.

6HFXULWLHV$FFRXQWDQG3RUWIROLR
&RPSDQ\FRGH
SRVLWLRQ
3RUWIROLR 3RUWIROLR
SRVLWLRQ SRVLWLRQ
6HFDFFW 6HFDFFW
SRVLWLRQ SRVLWLRQ
6LQJOH 6LQJOH
SRVLWLRQV SRVLWLRQV
 SAP AG 2001

The level at which you manage your financial positions is of fundamental importance. Position
management is the basis for valuation.
In the money market, foreign exchange, derivatives and loans areas, you manage transactions as single
items. You can manage securities positions for a securities account, portfolio, for several securities
accounts, and in some cases, as single items.
You can create several portfolios within a company code. You can assign several securities accounts to a
portfolio. You use securities accounts to manage and value your positions. You need them for all
transactions that require position management. This primarily applies for listed securities. You can use
securities accounts as a basis for generating securities account statements, evaluating positions, and
performing securities account transfers. A securities account in the system usually relates to an existing
securities account at a bank. Securities accounts ensure that the legal framework and the related
administrative rules can be observed.
A portfolio is an evaluation unit in the company code, to which you can assign securities accounts
(securities area) or financial transactions (money market, forex, derivatives).
You can use portfolios to run an aggregated evaluation of different financial products. A portfolio also
acts as a risk management instrument for controlling and evaluating a your company’s risk positions. In
the securities area, you can value positions for accounting purposes at portfolio level.

'HILQH3RUWIROLRV
GOHOHO
&RPSDQ\FRGH
&)03RUWIROLRSRVLWLRQ
3RUWIROLR 3RUWIROLRQDPH

! "
$#

! %#
&')(+* & ,-" ./!0
12435'76 8 1 /
:9"/!0
6 *; 8 </
- =..!>
?@'@( A= ? ,
:BDCDEFG
HI . ! J
?@'@( A=$# ? ,
:BDCDEFG
HI . ! N#
1 K4 L 8 1 9
-DEH
.
KL 8 <$.
,H5EHH
M
 SAP AG 2001

To evaluate and value positions at portfolio level, you first have to define the portfolios.
You define your company-specific portfolios in Customizing. An example of a possible entry would be a
trader portfolio.

6HFXULWLHV$FFRXQW0DVWHU'DWD
&RPSDQ\FRGH
PRQSQTQ
6HFXULWLHVDFFW U5VW:X Y+Z5[ [
6HFXULWLHVDFFW,'
Bank information
'HSRVLWRU\EDQN '(8%$
&OHDULQJDFFW ;;
6HFDFFWQXPEHU %DQN
House bank
GDWD
+RXVHEDQN '(8%$
+RXVHEDQNDFFW (85
Disposition block
%ORFNIODJXQWLO
%ORFNLQJW\SH 2WKHU
Assignments GDWD
%XVLQHVVDUHD
3RUWIROLR 3RUWIROLR
 SAP AG 2002

The securities accounts you create in the system usually represent existing securities accounts at a bank.
Meaning of selected fields in the securities account master data:
y 'HSRVLWRU\EDQN: Partner ID of the bank where the securities account is kept. You first create
the bank as a business partner in the role of "depository bank".
y 6HFXULWLHVDFFRXQWQR: Number of the securities account at the depository bank.
y &OHDULQJDFFRXQW: Account number of the cash clearing account at the depository bank.
y +RXVHEDQN: Name of the bank with which the cash clearing account for the new securities account is
kept.
y +RXVHEDQNDFFRXQW: Name of the cash clearing account in the SAP system.
y %ORFNLQJW\SH: If a restraint on disposal applies to the whole securities account, you must specify the
blocking type.
y %ORFNIODJXQWLO: Date until which the restraint on disposal applies for the securities account.
y 3RUWIROLR: Assignment of the securities account to a portfolio. This field is displayed if the 3RUWIROLR
indicator is set in Customizing.
y %XVLQHVVDUHD: When you post a transaction, the system uses the business area defined in the securities
account master data. If there is no entry in the securities account master data, the system uses the entry
in the account assignment reference.
You can delete securities account master data if no position indicator exists and no transactions
exist/existed.
'HILQLQJ7UDGHUDQG8VHU'DWD
\] ^`_ba:]bcbd
\] ^`_ba:]bcSe
\] ^`_ba:]bcSf
&RPSDQ\FRGH
g hTa:] i \kjDlmn$o:mp\]q^S_bab]
r]>s`tvu i w\ d \]0^`_Ga:]bcbd
 SAP AG 2001

You define traders per company code. If a trader is active in several company codes, you have to make
the relevant settings in each company code.
You can define trader-specific input rules as user data. For example, M = million, T = thousand. WDC
enables you to carry out a working day check, and REC a rate entry check.
Once you have created the trader and assigned a user name, you must assign this person authorizations
for the transactions he or she is allowed to conclude.

7UDGHUV7UDGHU$XWKRUL]DWLRQV
7UDGHU
DXWKRUL]DWLRQ
&)0 $XWKRUL]DWLRQ
7UDGHU 0RQH\PDUNHW ;
)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW
$VVLJQ $)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW
,QYHVWPHQW
%RUURZLQJ
'HSRVLWDWQRWLFH
$&DOOPRQH\
,QYHVWPHQW
%RUURZLQJ
 SAP AG 2001

When you assign transaction authorizations for traders, you can restrict the trading powers to certain
financial instruments (such as money market), product categories, product types, or transaction types. A
higher-level authorization means that a trader is allowed to create any transaction below this level. For
example, a trader authorized for the money market area automatically has authorization to conclude a
fixed-term deposit or a deposit at notice. Similarly, authorization for a product category automatically
includes the product type and transaction type levels below it.
Before you can assign trader authorizations, you must define the trader in Customizing.
To run evaluations that concentrate on the transactions or positions of a trader, you can store the name of
the trader in the transaction. You can enter the trader name manually when you conclude the transaction,
or let the system propose the trader name automatically on the basis of the user name. You can assign
specific user data to your traders. This speeds up data entry, and allows you to use automatic checks for
working days and rates/prices (on the basis of defined deviation intervals).
The logic for assigning authorizations is the same as for business partner authorizations.

2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV8QLW6XPPDU\
z 7KHHQWU\DQGVHOHFWLRQRSWLRQVLQWKH
DSSOLFDWLRQGHSHQGRQWKHVHWWLQJVPDGHLQ
&XVWRPL]LQJ
z 7KH&)0PRGXOHVPDNHXVHRIWKHFHQWUDO6$3
RUJDQL]DWLRQDOVWUXFWXUHV<RXFDQDOVRFUHDWH
VSHFLILFSRUWIROLRVDQGVHFXULWLHVDFFRXQWVWR
PDQDJH\RXUSRVLWLRQV
z 7RUHFRUGWUDGHUGDWDZLWK\RXUILQDQFLDO
WUDQVDFWLRQV\RXVHWXSFRUUHVSRQGLQJWUDGHUV
LQ&XVWRPL]LQJDQGDVVLJQDXWKRUL]DWLRQVWR
WKHPLQWKHDSSOLFDWLRQ
 SAP AG 2001


([HUFLVHV
8QLW2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
7RSLF'HILQLQJ2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
• Organizational units in SAP CFM

• Configuring trader and user data
You first want to gain an overview of the organizational units used in

SAP CFM. You then want to assign corresponding trader data to the
system users.
1-1 Create the following SRUWIROLR for your company code TRXX in Customizing: Portf-
XX.
1-2 Create your own WUDGHU in Customizing using the name "T-XX", overwriting the entry
"TREASURERXX". Assign this trader to your user name
TREA-XX.
1-3 The trader is authorized to conclude money market, foreign exchange, derivatives and
securities transactions. Define the corresponding DXWKRUL]DWLRQV for your trader.

6ROXWLRQV
8QLW2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
7RSLF'HILQLQJ2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
1-1 Create portfolio
&XVWRPL]LQJ
Ö&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQWÖ7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHUÖ*HQHUDO6HWWLQJV
Ö2UJDQL]DWLRQÖ'HILQH3RUWIROLR

(QWHU\RXUFRPSDQ\FRGH75;;DQGFKRRVH1HZHQWULHVEXWWRQ6DYH\RXU
HQWULHV
1-2 Create trader and assign user name
&XVWRPL]LQJ
Ö2UJDQL]DWLRQÖ'HILQH7UDGHUV

(QWHU\RXUFRPSDQ\FRGH75;;DQGFKRRVH1HZHQWULHVEXWWRQ6DYH\RXU
HQWULHV

Ö2UJDQL]DWLRQÖ'HILQH8VHU'DWD

)LQG\RXUXVHUDQGRYHUZULWH75($685(5;;ZLWK\RXUQHZWUDGHU7;;6DYH
\RXUHQWULHV
1-3 Create user authorizations
Application:
Ö Accounting Ö Corporate Finance Management Ö Transaction Manager Ö General

Functions Ö Trader Authorizations
Enter your trader T-XX and your company code TRXX, and choose (QWHU. Set the
indicators and save your entries.

%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
&RQWHQWV
z Business partners - general
z Central SAP business partner
z Conversion of the Treasury business partner to the SAP
business partner
z Standing instructions and
transaction authorizations
 SAP AG 2001


%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV8QLW2EMHFWLYHV
z Configure the SAP business partner

z Describe the role categories used in CFM and
create business partner relationships
z Perform the conversion to the SAP business
partner
z Set up standing instructions and define
authorizations for the business partner
 SAP AG 2001


2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
%DQNV
,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV%XVLQHVV6FHQDULR
z %HIRUH\RXFDQFRQFOXGHILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQV
ZLWKDEXVLQHVVSDUWQHU\RXPXVWFUHDWHWKH
SDUWQHULQWKH%DVLF)XQFWLRQVDUHDRIWKH
DSSOLFDWLRQ7RGRWKLV\RXXVHWKH6$3EXVLQHVV
SDUWQHU
z <RXRQO\ZDQWWRDXWKRUL]HFHUWDLQEXVLQHVV
SDUWQHUVIRUFHUWDLQWUDQVDFWLRQV
z :KHQ\RXFUHDWHWUDQVDFWLRQVZLWKDEXVLQHVV
SDUWQHU\RXZDQWWKHV\VWHPWRGHIDXOWWRFHUWDLQ
VHWWLQJV\RXKDYHGHILQHGIRUWKDWSDUWQHU:KDW
RSWLRQVDUHDYDLODEOH"
 SAP AG 2001


%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV2YHUYLHZ
&XVWRPL]LQJ

3UHUHTXLVLWH
IRU
&UHDWLQJEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUV
3UHUHTXLVLWH
IRU
&UHDWLQJILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQV
 SAP AG 2001

Depending on your liquidity situation (CM), your risk situation (MRA), and the revenue and risk targets
you have set, you conclude certain financial transactions with your EXVLQHVVSDUWQHUV.
Example: You have a liquidity surplus, and invest this surplus amount with the business partner "Bank
A" as a fixed-term deposit.
The functions for entering transactions are based on the Customizing settings for the transaction
architecture (product types, transaction types, ...), and certain application data, such as business partner
information (address, bank details, …).
In the CFM Transaction Manager, you enter each financial transaction with a (specific) business partner.
You must create the business partner in the system before you can enter transactions.
The settings that have been made for business partners in Customizing determine the options available
for creating business partners in the application.

%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU'HILQLWLRQ
z $EXVLQHVVSDUWQHULVDQDWXUDORUOHJDOSHUVRQZLWKZKRP
\RXKDYHDEXVLQHVVUHODWLRQVKLS
z 7KHUHDUHGLIIHUHQWEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUFDWHJRULHV
2UJDQL]DWLRQ
*URXS
1DWXUDOSHUVRQ
2UJDQL]DWLRQ
 SAP AG 2001

A business partner is a natural person, organization or group of persons/organizations with which your
company can have a variety of relationships.
Business partners are divided into various categories, which each have different attributes. CFM
differentiates between the following categories:
y Person (examples: private individual, broker)
y Organization (examples: bank, company)
y Group (examples: non-trading partnership, shared apartment)

%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU)HDWXUHV
z %XVLQHVVLQWHUHVWLVFHQWHUHGRQWKH Î $EXVLQHVVSDUWQHULVRQO\HQWHUHG
EXVLQHVVSDUWQHUFHQWUDOSDUWQHU LQWKHV\VWHPRQFH
YLHZ
z $EXVLQHVVSDUWQHUFDQEHLQYROYHG
LQGLIIHUHQWEXVLQHVVSURFHVVHV Î %XVLQHVVSDUWQHUUROHFRQFHSW
z $EXVLQHVVSDUWQHUFDQEHUHODWHGWR Î %XVLQHVVSDUWQHUUHODWLRQVKLSV
RWKHUEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUVLQYDULRXVZD\V
z <RXFDQHQWHUFRPSDQ\VSHFLILF Î ([WHQVLELOLW\VXSSRUWHGLQIXWXUH

EXVLQHVVSDUWQHULQIRUPDWLRQ UHOHDVHV
z <RXFDQFRQILJXUHWKHVFUHHQILHOGVDQG
SURFHVVLQJVHTXHQFHDFFRUGLQJWR\RXU Î &RQILJXUDELOLW\VXSSRUWHGLQIXWXUH
FRPSDQ\
VUHTXLUHPHQWV UHOHDVHV
z 7KHEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUIXQFWLRQVDUH Î &RPPXQLFDWLRQEDVHGRQ
FRPSDWLEOHZLWKDSSOLFDWLRQVLQH[LVWLQJ SUHGHILQHGPHWKRGV
V\VWHPHQYLURQPHQWV
 SAP AG 2001

Various components within the SAP system have developed their own business partner management
functions, which are not compatible with each other. Users who work with these components in parallel
often have to enter the central data for a business partner (name, address, bank details, ...) several times,
since there is no automatic link.
The 6$3%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUfacilitates this data integration.
Up to now, the Corporate Finance Management (CFM) applications, formerly Treasury Management,
used the Treasury business partner. Release Banking 4.62 / CFM 1.0 incorporated the first phase of the
conversion process to replace the Treasury business partner with the SAP business partner [Exception:
/RDQV0DQDJHPHQW (CML) still used the Treasury business partner]. The CFM applications integrated
the SAP business partner in the processing interface. In this first phase, a corresponding SAP business
partner had to exist for each Treasury business partner and vice versa (parallel maintenance phase).
Release Banking 4.63 / CFM 2.0 incorporates the second phase of this conversion process. From now
on, only the SAP business partner is relevant.

%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU'DWD2YHUYLHZ
%XVLQHVV
SDUWQHU
*HQHUDO &RPSDQ\FRGH
UROHGDWD GDWD
/HJDOGDWD
$GGUHVV$GGUHVVRYHUYLHZ $FFRXQWPDQDJHPHQW
)LVFDO\HDULQIRUPDWLRQ
&RQWUROGDWD%DQNGDWD $FFRXQWLQJ
3HUVRQDOGDWD
7D[GDWD $FFRXQWLQWHUHVWFDOF
(PSOR\PHQWGDWD
%DQNGHWDLOV 3D\PHQWGDWD
$GGLWLRQDOGDWD
3D\PHQWWUDQVDFWLRQV $XWRPSPQWWUDQVDFW
&UHGLWVWDQGLQJ
5HODWLRQVKLSV 'XQQLQJGDWD
)LVFDOGDWD
5ROHGDWD &RUUHVSRQGHQFHGDWD
6WDWUHSRUWLQJGDWD
 SAP AG 2002

In CFM, you conclude financial transactions with a business partner. Typical partners are banks, or a
central treasury division. You create a master record for each business partner.
The XVHU LQWHUIDFH for business partner data was fully revised as part of the Enjoy project. The screen
layout has been restructured, and you can now navigate between several tabs containing the individual
business partner views.
The data you can maintain for a business partner is split into two areas:
y General role data
Stored centrally for all roles. Access to the data can vary according to the role category, depending on
the settings in Customizing.
y Company code-dependent data
Data that only applies for the role category in the respective company code.

5ROH&RQFHSW
z $EXVLQHVVSDUWQHU%3FDQKDYHVHYHUDO%3UROHV
z $%3UROHLVDIXQFWLRQKHOGE\DEXVLQHVVSDUWQHU$JLYHQ
UROHFDQRQO\EHDVVLJQHGWRDSDUWQHURQFH
z 5HODWHG%3UROHFDWHJRULHVFDQEHJURXSHGLQD%3UROH
FDWHJRU\JURXSLQJ
z (DFK%3DWWULEXWHEHORQJVWRRQH%3YLHZ
z (DFK%3YLHZEHORQJVWRRQHRUVHYHUDO%3UROHFDWHJRULHV
 SAP AG 2001

The business partner role defines the function of a business partner in a given transaction. Examples of
business partner roles are "counterparty", "issuer", or "depository bank". The role assignment determines
the business partner’s rights and obligations. A business partner can have several roles.
You define the roles of a business partner by assigning role categories to the partner.

5ROHVDQG)XQFWLRQVLQ&)0
1DWXUDO
SHUVRQ
2UJDQL]DWLRQ
%RUURZHU
$JHQWFRXQWHUSDUW\
1RWDU\
([SHUWDSSUDLVDOV ,QWHUHVWHGSDUW\
&RXQWHUSDUW\
%HQHILFLDU\
,VVXHU
'HSRVLWRU\EDQN
7UXVWFRPSDQ\
3D\HUHH
$VVLJQLQJLQVWLWXWLRQ
*XDUDQWRU
 SAP AG 2001

You can assign several roles or functions to one business partner.

A role (= role category) specifies the characteristics a business partner must have before you can perform
certain transaction activities with that partner. The business partner roles are used to record the functions
of a business partner in a particular transaction.
The role category also determines the ULJKWVDQGREOLJDWLRQV of the business partner in a given business
transaction.
Example in CFM: A business partner has the role &RXQWHUSDUW\.
The roles of the SAP business partner correspond to those available for the former Treasury business
partner, with the exception of role 7UHDVXU\EXVLQHVVSDUWQHUwhich does not have an SAP
business partner equivalent. This role is transferred to the SAP business partner role 75
&RXQWHUSDUW\.

&UHDWLQJD%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU
"! !
&KRRVH%3UROHV
75&RXQWHUSDUW\
&RXQWHUSDUW\
$VVLJQFXVWRPHU
&RPSDQ\FRGH
9DOLGIURP
*URXSLQJ
%XVLQHVVSDUWQHUFDW
# 3HUVRQ
# 2UJDQL]DWLRQ
# *URXS
 SAP AG 2001

When you create a business partner in the system, you must specify a business partner role, the business
partner category and the grouping in the initial screen.
If you want to assign an FI customer at the same time, select the corresponding indicator.
You define the grouping in Customizing. The grouping lets you classify the business partners according
to your own criteria.

&XVWRPL]LQJDQG$SSOLFDWLRQ
&XVWRPL]LQJ
*URXSLQJ
*URXSLQJ 1XPEHUUDQJHV
1XPEHUUDQJHV
%3FDWHJRU\
%3FDWHJRU\ %3W\SH
%3W\SH
5ROHFDWHJRU\
5ROHFDWHJRU\ 5ROHW\SH
5ROHW\SH
)LHOGPRGLILFDWLRQV
)LHOGPRGLILFDWLRQV
5HODWLRQVKLSFDWHJRULHV
5HODWLRQVKLSFDWHJRULHV 5HODWLRQVKLSW\SHV
5HODWLRQVKLSW\SHV
'DWDHQWU\DQGUHOHDVH
'DWDHQWU\DQGUHOHDVH $SSOLFDWLRQ
%3DXWKRUL]DWLRQ
%3DXWKRUL]DWLRQ
6WDQGLQJLQVWUXFWLRQV
6WDQGLQJLQVWUXFWLRQV
 SAP AG 2002

The JURXSLQJ lets you classify business partners according to your own criteria.
Examples:
Grouping1: Partners for money market, forex, and derivatives transactions
Grouping 2: Partners for loan transactions
The business partner UROHV (role categories) define the functions of a business partner in a particular
transaction. The role category determines which application functions are permitted or excluded.
BXVLQHVVSDUWQHUFDWHJRU\: You create a business partner either as an "organization" or a "natural
person". The business partner category determines the type of data you need to enter (for example, legal
form for an organization, marital status for a natural person).
You can use the ILHOGPRGLILFDWLRQ functions to define which fields in the respective business partner
views are required, optional, or suppressed.
You can link business partners using UHODWLRQVKLSV.
The data the user enters is divided into JHQHUDOGDWD and FRPSDQ\FRGHGDWD.
You have to DXWKRUL]H the business partner for the permitted transactions.
6WDQGLQJLQVWUXFWLRQV are general agreements made with a business partner for processing similar types
of transactions.

*URXSLQJDQG1XPEHU5DQJHV
&)0
&UHDWH
EXVLQHVV
SDUWQHU
&XVWRPL]LQJ
*URXS'HVFULSWLRQ 1R57[,QW7[([W
75 &)0SDUWQHULQW

75 &)0SDUWQHUH[W
%3JURXSLQJ
1R )UQR 7RQR &XUUQR ([W

$%$&$$'$$ ====== ;
1XPEHUUDQJHV
 SAP AG 2001

You define the number range for the business partner via the business partner grouping. This number
range controls whether the business partner key is assigned internally by the system, or externally by the
user. It also determines whether numeric or alphanumeric entries are permitted.
To map payment flows in Cash Management, you assign a planning group to the business partner
(&RPSDQ\FRGHGDWD!$FFRXQWLQIRUPDWLRQ). This ensures that the payment flows are included in Cash
Management, even if the payment details are missing in the transaction.

'HILQH%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU7\SHVDQG5ROH7\SHV
() *,+) - /./ 01

2324265 7)8%90:;3<>=@?BADCE9GF49IHE9@?BA :JAG<K;L?A 9
M NLO
QP + R>BS TBUQ

V*+
W2E265 ] ?HN49<6A*;3FDA9,M <4C^6_B?A 9I` 265\[D5 ] ?HNE9@<6A@;KFLA90:
W2E23X ] ?HN49<6A*;3FDA9,M <4C^3aB?H49
` Y/Z 265\[D5 ] ?HNE9@<6A@;KFLA90:
Y/Z
 SAP AG 2001

You can use the EXVLQHVVSDUWQHUW\SH in the Customizing settings to group business partners according
to your own requirements. You can then specify in Customizing which fields should be shown or hidden
when partners of this type are entered in the application.
The functions of the business partner in a financial transaction are defined using business partner roles
(UROHFDWHJRULHV). The role categories are predefined in the system. You can refine these role categories
by defining your own UROHW\SHV in Customizing.
The fields that appear on the screen vary for each role category. The fields are also dependent on the
business partner category. This enables you to distinguish between different standard addresses, for
example.

)LHOG0RGLILFDWLRQ
! !
Field modification

IRUDFWLYLWLHV IRU%3UROH%3W\SH
$FW6KRUWWH[W %3UROH 1DPH

&UHDWH %.. $FFRXQWKROGHU
&KDQJH
'LVSOD\ 75 &RXQWHUSDUW\
)OGJU +LGH 5HTXLUHG 2SWILHOG 'LVSOD\

&UHGLWVWDQGLQJ R R ;
R R
,QGXVWU\ R ;
R R R

 SAP AG 2001

You can configure the individual entry fields in the business partner views using the field selection
options in Customizing.
A data field can be set as "required", "optional", "display only", or "hidden" (suppressed).
You can use the field selection control settings to configure fields according to activity (create, change,
or display business partner), or according to the role category and the business partner type.
When you create a business partner in the application, the data fields you can maintain in the respective
views depend on the following:
y Business partner type
y Grouping
y Activity (create, change, display)
y Field modification

%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV5HODWLRQVKLSV
2XWJRLQJUHODWLRQVKLS
"subsidiary of"
5HODWLRQVKLS
3DUHQWFRPSDQ\ 6XEVLGLDU\
Dependent on classification
5HODWLRQVKLSFDWHJRU\ u3ieh vet\g w i oplD\b x ce\m s dqnpgpfoey qq g\rkzkhq{ ikdjs t w i opx s q g1y q zE{
uL|Ld1y
lD}6~3 fQg z s y d { y lDmenpoeq rkq dps t
op mEn1oeq r4q des t 11
5HODWLRQVKLSW\SHV
 SAP AG 2001

You can enter relationships with other business partners in the system on the 5HODWLRQVKLSVtab.
The relationship categories you can choose from are predefined in the system and depend on the
business partner classification.
Example: "Subsidiary of ..." for an organization, or "Wife of ..." for a natural person
You can make finer distinctions within a relationship category by defining UHODWLRQVKLSW\SHV. You do
this in the Customizing activity 'HILQH5HODWLRQVKLS7\SHV where you assign each relationship type to
one of the predefined relationship categories.
The LQJRLQJUHODWLRQVKLSV for a business partner are all the relationships defined in the master data for
the other partner.
2XWJRLQJUHODWLRQVKLSV are all the relationships with other business partners that have been entered in the
master data for a particular business partner.

2WKHU&XVWRPL]LQJ6HWWLQJV
%XVLQHVVSDUWQHU
,QWKLVVHFWLRQ\RXPDNH
*HQHUDO6HWWLQJV DGGLWLRQDOVHWWLQJVLQRUGHU
*HQHUDO6HWWLQJVIRU)LQDQFLDO6HUYLFHV WRKDYHDUDQJHRIVHOHFWLRQ
6SHFLDO6HWWLQJVIRU)LQDQFLDO6HUYLFHV RSWLRQVZKHQ\RXHQWHU
6HWWLQJVIRU&XVWRPHU EXVLQHVVSDUWQHUGDWD
LQWKHDSSOLFDWLRQ
,QFOXGLQJ
1DWXUDO3HUVRQV
2UJDQL]DWLRQV
&UHGLW6WDQGLQJ
5HOHDVH
 SAP AG 2001


5HOHDVH&RQWURO
$FWLYDWHUHOHDVH
&3% ; %XVSDUWQHU 3DUWQHU
'HILQHUHOHDVHSDUDPHWHUV
Role cat. ReSt Active
75 ;
 SAP AG 2001

You can use the release function to set up a procedure for approving changes to business partners. The
release procedure determines whether newly-created business partners or changes to existing business
partners have to be approved by one or several other employees.
If you activate the release procedure for business partners in Customizing, any business partner data that
is created or changed must be released before transactions can be entered with that partner.
You can apply different release procedures for each role category. In each case, you can assign the
appropriate release status (release by one employee, release by two employees, ...).
Above example: If you change the data for a business partner with role category TR0151, the change
must be released by two employees before the business partner can be used.
The business partner release function uses the SAP Business Workflow, based on the standard role
20000053 ’TRLOAPPROVAL’ and the workflow template WS20000263 ’WSTRLOAPPROV’. In the
Transaction Manager you can only create financial transactions with released business partners.

&UHDWH%3)URP),&XVWRPHU9HQGRU
0 I

I 0
U .
,*+
• ()' ( .
,+
•

./ U1 .
, S
 SAP AG 2002

You can copy a customer or vendor that already exists in FI to create a business partner. The system uses
the data entered in the 6SHFLILFDWLRQV section to establish a link between the existing customer or vendor
and the new business partner you are creating.
You can use the special functions &UHDWH:LWK),&XVWRPHUand &KDQJH:LWK),&XVWRPHU to transfer
the existing FI customer account data to a business partner. The system checks beforehand whether the
customer account can be transferred to a business partner.
Prerequisites:
y The customer must exist in the system.
y The customer has not yet been assigned to a business partner.
y If the customer is a natural person, the partner must also be a natural person and must have been
created as a natural person in the system.
y If the customer account is a suspense account, the partner grouping must also be for suspense
accounts. A grouping used for suspense accounts may not be used for other accounts.
y The partner category for suspense accounts must be "collective partner".

7KH&HQWUDO6$3%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU
z &RQWDLQVFHQWUDOGDWDVXFKDVQDPHVDGGUHVVHV
FRPPXQLFDWLRQGHWDLOVDQGEDQNGHWDLOVJOREDODWWULEXWHV
z $OORZVHDV\LPSOHPHQWDWLRQRILQGXVWU\VSHFLILFDQG
XVHUVSHFLILFHQKDQFHPHQWV
z 6WRUHVWKHGDWDLQDFHQWUDOPDVWHUUHFRUGZKLFKFXWVGRZQ
GDWDPDLQWHQDQFHUHGXFHVWKHUHTXLUHGVWRUDJHFDSDFLW\
DQGSUHYHQWVGDWDLQFRQVLVWHQFLHV
z :DVGHYHORSHGXVLQJWKH%XVLQHVV'DWD7RROVHW
z &DQEHHYDOXDWHGDQGDQDO\]HGXVLQJYDULRXVUHSRUWV
SDUWQHUUROHVSDUWQHUGDWDSDUWQHUUHODWLRQVKLSVVWDQGLQJ
LQVWUXFWLRQVFKDQJHV
z &DQEHDUFKLYHGDORQJZLWKWKHVWDQGLQJLQVWUXFWLRQVXVLQJ

WKHDUFKLYLQJREMHFW7570B%3$5
 SAP AG 2002

The SAP business partner enables you to create and manage business partners centrally. This is
particularly useful when a partner does business with the company in different roles, such as contract
party and prospective customer.
The SAP business partner has been designed to minimize data redundancy and offer the advantages of
data integration. It also focuses more strongly on managing customer relationships and new customer
acquisitions.
You can link business partners with FI customers and vendors. You can also maintain part of the
customer/vendor data directly in the business partner user interface.
This brings together partner data that may be spread out over several systems, and enables you to
identify potential customers for new contracts from within your existing customer base.

&RQYHUVLRQRIWKH75%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUWRWKH6$3
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU2YHUYLHZ
z 3KDVH75%3DQG6$3%3XVHGVHSDUDWHO\%&
z 3KDVH75%3XQG6$3%3XVHGLQSDUDOOHO
&)0LVFRPPLWWHGWRXVLQJWKH6$3%3IURP5HOHDVH%DQNLQJ
&)0
&0/FRQWLQXHVWRXVHWKH75%3LQ5HOHDVH%DQNLQJ&)0
+RZHYHULWLVSRVVLEOHWRDFWLYDWHWKHSDUDOOHOXSGDWH
z 3KDVH2QO\6$3%3LVXVHG
$VIURP5HOHDVH%DQNLQJ&)0ERWK&0/DQG&)0XVH
WKH6$3%3
 SAP AG 2002

You must FRQYHUW the Treasury business partner to the SAP business partner if you work with the 6$3
%DQNLQJ or &)0 applications. These applications used to use the Treasury business partner and have
now changed over to the SAP business partner. The conversion process involved two phases.
If you are a QHZFXVWRPHU implementing %DQNLQJ / &)0, you do not need to convert the data
(phase I), nor assign new keys (phase II). However, you must make sure that the following indicators are
set in Customizing:
IMG activity 6$3%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUIRU)LQDQFLDO6HUYLFHV!6HWWLQJVIRU&RQYHUVLRQDQG3DUDOOHO
0DLQWHQDQFHRI75%3DQG6$3%3!&RQYHUVLRQ3KDVH,!$FWLYDWH3DUDOOHO0DLQWHQDQFH
Processing: Space
Phase 2: Set
Processing: Set
The system then automatically uses and references the SAP business partner. If you are a new customer
implementing CFM, you only need to make the Customizing settings for the SAP business partner.

&RQYHUVLRQ$FWLYLWLHVLQ3KDVHV,DQG,,
z 3KDVH,
&XVWRPHUVDUHUHTXLUHGWRFRQYHUWWKHPDLQWHQDQFHLQWHUIDFH
LQ&)0DQG6(0WRWKH6$3%37KHDSSOLFDWLRQVZULWHWKH
UHIHUHQFHVWRWKH75%3WRWKHGDWDEDVH
&0/FRQWLQXHVWRXVHWKH75%3EXWLWLVSRVVLEOHWRDFWLYDWH
WKHSDUDOOHOXSGDWH
z 3KDVH,,
$OODSSOLFDWLRQVPDLQWDLQEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUVXVLQJWKH6$3%3
$OODSSOLFDWLRQVXSGDWHWKHUHIHUHQFHVWRWKH6$3%3
2EMHFWDGGUHVVHVDUHFRQYHUWHG
 SAP AG 2002

The Treasury business partner was replaced by the SAP Business Partner in two phases:
y In 3KDVH, (parallel maintenance phase), some applications already used the SAP business partner,
whilst others still used the Treasury business partner. The business partners were managed in parallel.
This phase began with the upgrade to Release %DQNLQJ&)0 After the upgrade, special
reports were used to generate SAP business partners for the Treasury business partners. Customers
using this release then had to activate parallel maintenance.
y In 3KDVH,,, the Treasury business partner is no longer used by any application. This phase begins
with Release %DQNLQJ&)0.

&RQYHUVLRQ3KDVH3DUDOOHO0DLQWHQDQFH
B/) Q)©ª«¬
)0 ¡¢ £ ¢¤B¢Q¤6¥ ¦£B ¢ B ¢ ¡¢ £ ¢1¤¢Q¤6¥ §I ¨B
¡ £ ¥ § ¢ ¨ ¢ ¢1¤ ©ª«¬ ¡ £ ¥ § ¢ B¨ ¢ ¢¤ V©Qª¬
£ ¥ §* £

® ¤ £¯¨ ¢
° 6¥ ¨
©ª«¬ ¡ §
¢ ¨B±
¡/¤ £B²/¨ ³¢ )´ ¢1 ¡
75%3 6$3%3
¡ §I ¢ ¨±

¡¤ £B²¨ ³¢ )´ ¢ ¡0
 SAP AG 2001

Release %DQNLQJ&)0introduced Phase I of the business partner conversion process. In this

phase, some applications had already converted to the SAP business partner, whilst others had not.
After converting the existing Treasury business partners into SAP business partners, customers using this
release had to activate parallel maintenance. During the parallel maintenance phase, the system
automatically created a Treasury business partner each time an SAP business partner was created, and
vice versa. The same applies for changes made to business partners.

&RQYHUVLRQ3KDVH6$3%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU
© ¢ · ¶B¸/¹¢IT¡ £ ¥ §I £ TB)©ª«¬º >/)©Qª¬

6 ¡/³ ¢ )´°§ ¡¢1 £°»,´¦¨ ³ B¼ ¡³ ¢ )´µ§
&RQYHUVLRQ
&XVWRPL]LQJ
©ª«¬
¢ § B³ ¡6¢ ³ §I
$XWRPDWLF
SDUDOOHOPDLQWHQDQFH
0DVWHUGDWD 6$3%3
6$3%3
)ORZGDWD
 SAP AG 2002

From Release Banking 4.63 / CFM 2.0, all applications only use the SAP business partner. The only
exception is SAP Real Estate (RE), which is part of the R/3 core.
From phase II, all the applications update their tables with references to the SAP business partner. Since
SAP RE still uses the Treasury business partner, and RE and CML share common tables, the Treasury
and SAP business partners must have identical numbers from phase II onwards. Customers who opted to
keep different numbers for Treasury and SAP business partners in phase I now have to apply code
conversion routines to ensure identical numbers for phase II. This also involves converting the tables for
the Treasury business partner itself.
In particular, this procedure applies for RE customers who have installed the add-on for Banking / CFM
and use RE and CFM/Banking in parallel.

8WLOLWLHVDQG'LIIHUHQFHV,
z &RQYHUVLRQUHSRUWV
&RQYHUVLRQWRROV
$XWRPDWLFFRGHFRQYHUVLRQ
z 'LIIHUHQFHVEHWZHHQWKH75%3DQGWKH6$3%3
,QLWLDOVFUHHQUROHGLIIHUHQWLDWLRQW\SH
5ROH
$GGUHVVHV
5HODWLRQVKLSV
*URXSUROHVEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUW\SH
/LQNWR),FXVWRPHU
 SAP AG 2001

You convert the existing Treasury business partners to SAP business partners using the following
reports:
y Conversion Report: Treasury Business Partner to SAP Business Partner (RFTBUP01)
y Conversion Report: Treasury BP Relationships to SAP BP (RFTBUP02)
y Conversion Report: Notes Relating to a Business Partner (RFTBUP06)
The application functions for processing SAP business partner data differ from those for processing
Treasury business partners. It is not possible, for example, to call up an SAP business partner without a
role. The roles %XVLQHVV3DUWQHU*HQHUDOand )7%%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU are delivered with the
system. These roles have only been created to enable you to create business partners in the system, and
are not linked to any other functions. The role )7%%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU includes all the treasury-
specific entry fields and maintenance of the standing instructions (without FI customer).
In this way, the role concept of the SAP business partner differs from that of the Treasury business
partner. You can only call up an SAP business partner in a specific role. There is no general business
partner data as for the Treasury business partner. The roles of the SAP business partner correspond to
those available for the Treasury business partner, with the exception of role 7UHDVXU\EXVLQHVV
SDUWQHUwhich does not have an SAP business partner equivalent. SAP plans to transfer this role to the
SAP business partner role 75&RXQWHUSDUW\.

8WLOLWLHVDQG'LIIHUHQFHV,,
z &RQYHUVLRQUHSRUWV
&RQYHUVLRQWRROV
$XWRPDWLFFRGHFRQYHUVLRQ
z 'LIIHUHQFHVEHWZHHQWKH75%3DQGWKH6$3%3
,QLWLDOVFUHHQUROHGLIIHUHQWLDWLRQW\SH
5ROH
$GGUHVVHV
5HODWLRQVKLSV
*URXSUROHVEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUW\SH
/LQNWR),FXVWRPHU
 SAP AG 2001

The SAP business partner in CFM is linked to the central address management functions, which results
in several changes to the addresses of the Treasury business partners. The address can be used
independently of the business partner (company code, bank area, ... ).
The relationships of the SAP business partner do not correspond exactly to those of the Treasury
business partner. If the relationship categories delivered with the system do not fulfil your requirements,
you can create your own additional relationship categories (in the customer namespace, which means
that the relationship categories must begin with Y or Z).
The bank details of the SAP business partner are held in a separate database table and are independent of
the FI customer. This allows you to enter bank details for a business partner without having to create a
corresponding FI customer.
The SAP business partner is linked to the FI customer in a different way than the Treasury business
partner. In the case of the 7UHDVXU\EXVLQHVVSDUWQHUthe system creates an FI customer as soon as you
fill a customer field in the business partner data.
When you use the 6$3EXVLQHVVSDUWQHU the system creates an FI customer if this is defined for the
business partner role. In the Customizing settings delivered with the system, creation of an FI customer
is only defined for the role 75&RXQWHUSDUW\. When you create a business partner, you decide on the
second screen whether an FI customer should be created for this partner (counterparty).

%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV6WDQGLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
7UDQVDFWLRQ 3D\PHQW
DXWKRUL]DWLRQV GHWDLOV
%XVLQHVVSDUWQHU$
'HULYHG
&RUUHVSRQGHQFH
IORZV
 SAP AG 2002

Standing instructions are general agreements made with a business partner for processing similar types
of transactions. You can access the business partner standing instructions for payment details,
correspondence, authorizations and derived flows using the tabs on the business partner maintenance
screen. Since the standing instructions are integrated with the business partner data, the release
workflow for business partners can also be applied to the standing instructions. You can also access the
standing instructions using a separate menu path.
Agreements can cover:
y $XWKRUL]DWLRQV
Which financial transactions may be concluded with this partner?
y 3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
For transactions with business partner A ==> The system proposes the payment details for
business partner A in the transaction
y &RUUHVSRQGHQFH
For transactions with business partner A ==> Fixed setting: Which correspondence is
generated for which transactions?
y 'HULYHGIORZV
For transactions with business partner A ==> Fixed setting: If the transaction with business
partner A contains flow X, add
taxes/commission amounting to y% of X.

%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU$XWKRUL]DWLRQV
%XVSDUWQHU
DXWKRUL]DWLRQ
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU$
&)0 $XWKRUL]DWLRQ
0RQH\PDUNHW ;
$VVLJQ
)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW
$ )L[HGWHUPGHS
,QYHVWPHQW
%RUURZLQJ
'HSRVLWDWQRWLFH
% &DOOPRQH\
,QYHVWPHQW
%RUURZLQJ
 SAP AG 2001

To use a business partner (BP), you have to:

y Create the business partner
y Release the business partner (if required)
y Authorize the business partner for certain financial transactions
You can only assign WUDQVDFWLRQDXWKRUL]DWLRQV if the business partner has been released (where
release is required) and is not flagged for deletion.
You use transaction authorizations to control which transactions can be concluded with a particular
business partner. You can assign transaction authorizations at the following levels:
y Contract type
y Product category
y Product type
y Transaction type
You have to assign authorization explicitly to each business partnerLQHDFKFRPSDQ\FRGH.

%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV8QLW6XPPDU\
z Before you can conclude financial transactions with a

business partner, you must create, release and
authorize the partner in the %DVLF)XQFWLRQV area of the
application. To create business partners in the
application, you must first make the corresponding
settings in Customizing.
z Release Banking 4.63 / CFM 2.0 incorporates the
second and last phase of the process for replacing the
Treasury business partner with the SAP business
partner.
z You can set up standing instructions for a specific
business partner. The system proposes these values
(such as payment details) automatically when you
create a transaction with this partner.
 SAP AG 2001


([HUFLVHV
8QLW%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
7RSLF%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU*URXSLQJ
• Creating a new business partner in the system and assigning a

corresponding grouping
Before you can conclude financial transactions with a business partner,

you must create the partner in the %DVLF)XQFWLRQV area of the application.
To do this, you must first make the corresponding settings in
Customizing.
1-1 Is it currently possible to create a EXVLQHVVSDUWQHU in the role of "counterparty" with

the business partner grouping "TR01" and your own name "BPXX"?
__________________________ YES
__________________________ NO
1-2 In Customizing, create a business partner JURXSLQJ that allows you to assign an
external business partner name with alphabetic characters (number assignment). Name
the grouping G-XX. Leave the external standard grouping as TR02.

Business Partners ([HUFLVHV
7RSLF5ROHV)XQFWLRQV
• Creating a new business partner in the system

• Assigning roles and functions to the business partner
You want to create a new business partner with whom you can conclude
financial transactions. To do this, you must assign the role "Counterparty"
to your partner.
2-1 In future, you want to conclude transactions in your company code TRXX with the
business partner BPXX. Create the partner BPXX as an organization. Use the grouping
TR02 and your own grouping G-XX.
At this point, you do not want to assign an FI customer.
Check your entries using the &KHFN button.
2-2 Navigate to the various business partner tab pages.
2-3 In order to be able to make active payments to the partner when concluding money
market, forex and derivatives transactions, you may need to define a corresponding FI
customer for the new partner.
First, assign a corresponding account group (DEBI) to your new grouping in

Customizing.
Then assign an FI customer to the partner using the &KDQJH%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU function

in the application. Set the corresponding indicator and save the changed partner.


Business Partners ([HUFLVHV
7RSLF$GGLWLRQDO'DWD
• Creating additional data for a business partner
You want to enter additional master data for your business partner, such
as additional addresses, information about relationships with other
business partners, or the business partner’s credit standing.
3-1 Add the following information for your business partner BPXX:
- The business partner has a standard address and an alternative address

(button: $GGUHVVRYHUYLHZ).
- The legal form of the organization is a limited company (Ltd.)

(-> &RQWUROGDWD2UJDQL]DWLRQDOGDWD).
- Since the beginning of the month, partner BPXX is a subsidiary of the existing
business partner GP00 (-> 5HODWLRQVKLSV).
- Specify that the business partner in the role of "counterparty" is a "domestic

treasury partner" (-> Role type A001).
- The partner’s credit standing is very good (-> &UHGLW6WDQGLQJ'DWD).
3-2 You want to allow money market and foreign exchange deals with partner BPXX. In
the derivatives area, only interest rate swaps should be permitted. Assign
corresponding authorizations to the partner in theDSSOLFDWLRQ

6ROXWLRQV
7RSLF%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU*URXSLQJ
1-1 Is it currently possible to create a business partner with the grouping "TR01"?
_________________________ YES
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBB;BBBBBBB NO
1R7KHQXPEHUUDQJHDVVLJQHGWRWKHJURXSLQJ75KDVLQWHUQDOQXPEHU
DVVLJQPHQW$VDUHVXOWWKHV\VWHPGRHVQRWDOORZ\RXWRHQWHUDEXVLQHVVSDUWQHU
QDPHRI\RXURZQ

$SSOLFDWLRQ

Ö$FFRXQWLQJÖ&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQWÖ%DVLF)XQFWLRQVÖ0DVWHU
'DWDÖ%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUVÖ6$3%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUÖ%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUÖ&UHDWH
6HOHFWWKHUROH75&RXQWHUSDUW\DQGHQWHU\RXUGDWDFRXQWHUSDUW\%3;;
FRPSDQ\FRGH75;;JURXSLQJ75VHW%3W\SHLQGLFDWRU
1-2 Create grouping:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
Ö&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQWÖ%DVLF)XQFWLRQVÖ6$3%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU
IRU)LQDQFLDO6HUYLFHVÖ6$3%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUÖ*HQHUDO6HWWLQJVÖ%XVLQHVV
3DUWQHUÖ%DVLF6HWWLQJVÖ1XPEHU5DQJHVDQG*URXSLQJVÖ'HILQH*URXSLQJV
DQG$VVLJQ1XPEHU5DQJHV

&KRRVH1HZ(QWULHVRUFRS\WKHHQWU\75DQGPDNHWKHUHOHYDQWFKDQJHV
(QWHU*;;DQGWKHQXPEHUUDQJHDQGVDYH\RXUHQWULHV

Business Partners 6ROXWLRQV
7RSLF5ROHV)XQFWLRQV
2-1 Create "BPXX" as a business partner:
$SSOLFDWLRQ

6HOHFWWKHUROH75&RXQWHUSDUW\DQGHQWHUWKHEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUNH\
%3;;WKHFRPSDQ\FRGH75;;DQGWKHJURXSLQJ*;;&KRRVHWKHEXVLQHVV
SDUWQHUFDWHJRU\2UJDQL]DWLRQ
1H[WHQWHUWKHGDWDIRU\RXUQHZEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUQDPHDQGIRUPRIDGGUHVV
VWUHHWSRVWDOFRGHFLW\FRPPXQLFDWLRQODQJXDJH

&KHFN\RXUHQWULHVXVLQJWKH&KHFNEXWWRQ
2-2 Call up the various business partner tab pages.
$SSOLFDWLRQ
'DWDÖ%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUVÖ6$3%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUÖ%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUÖ
&KDQJHLIUHTXLUHG

1RWHWKDW\RXFDQDOVRXVHWKH1H[WVFUHHQEXWWRQ)WRPRYHRQWRWKHQH[WWDE
SDJH,QSDUWLFXODU\RXQHHGWRXVHWKLVIXQFWLRQIRUWKH5HODWLRQVKLSVWDE

2-3 Assign FI customer:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
Ö&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQWÖ%DVLF)XQFWLRQVÖ6$3%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU
IRU)LQDQFLDO6HUYLFHVÖ6$3%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUÖ6HWWLQJVIRU&XVWRPHUÖ$VVLJQ
*URXSLQJVDQG$FFRXQW*URXSV

$SSOLFDWLRQ
&KDQJH

6HWWKHLQGLFDWRUDQGVDYHWKHFKDQJH

Business Partners 6ROXWLRQV
7RSLF$GGLWLRQDO'DWD
3-1 Enter additional data for business partner BPXX:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
&KDQJH

6HOHFW75&RXQWHUSDUW\DQGHQWHU\RXUGDWD6DYH\RXUHQWULHV
3-2 Business partner authorizations:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
'DWDÖ%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUVÖ6$3%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUÖ6WDQGLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQVÖ
7UDQVDFWLRQ$XWKRUL]DWLRQV

$OWHUQDWLYHO\\RXFDQDVVLJQWKHWUDQVDFWLRQDXWKRUL]DWLRQVXVLQJWKH&KDQJH
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUIXQFWLRQ

0DLQWDLQWKHDXWKRUL]DWLRQVIRU\RXURZQFRPSDQ\FRGH
6DYH\RXUHQWULHV

%DQNV
&RQWHQWV
z Banks - general
z Business partner - bank details
z House banks + corresponding bank accounts
+ general ledger accounts
z Transaction - payment details
 SAP AG 2001


%DQNV8QLW2EMHFWLYHV
z Configure the whole banking environment

in the SAP System
z Differentiate between banks in general, business
partner banks, and house banks
z Define the cash management account name for
displaying the account balances in Cash Management
 SAP AG 2001


2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU
%DQNV
,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


%DQNV%XVLQHVV6FHQDULR
z ,QRUGHUWRSRVWIORZVWKDWLQYROYHLQFRPLQJ
RURXWJRLQJSD\PHQWV\RXKDYHWRVSHFLI\
SD\PHQWGHWDLOVLQWKHWUDQVDFWLRQ
z %HIRUH\RXFDQHQWHUSD\PHQWGHWDLOVLQWKH
WUDQVDFWLRQ\RXKDYHWRFUHDWHEDQNGDWDLQ
WKHV\VWHP<RXWKHQDVVLJQWKHEDQNGHWDLOV
WRWKHEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUV\RXKDYHDOUHDG\
FUHDWHG<RXQHHGWKHVHEDQNGHWDLOVWRPDNH
DFWXDOSD\PHQWVWRDSDUWQHU
z <RXFUHDWHWKHEDQNVZLWKZKLFK\RXUFRPSDQ\
NHHSVLWRZQDFFRXQWVDVKRXVHEDQNV
 SAP AG 2001


7UDQVDFWLRQ3D\PHQW'HWDLOV
BP bank details
Bank %DQN
Account GDWD
House bank
House bank account
&RQFOXVLRQRID
WUDQVDFWLRQZLWK
(QWHUHGLQ
EXVLQHVVSDUWQHU$
WUDQVDFWLRQ
PDQXDOO\
3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
3RVWLQJ3D\PHQW
 SAP AG 2001

To record the data for accounting purposes, you have to post the flows on the corresponding dates.
The system requires the following payment details to post the flows that are linked to incoming and
outgoing payments:
y Your own bank details: house bank and account (number)
y The bank details of your business partner (if required): bank and account (number)
The system uses the payment details to post the flows to the specified house bank account, and to write
the business partner’s details to the corresponding payment medium (using the payment program and the
print program).

%DQNV*HQHUDO0DVWHU'DWD

!#"" $&%%
'(*)+ ,.-,
/021

3 45
6 1 7
8$*:9
%DQN
6
.;
<="$
32>@?BAC
"
GDWD
'#0 D
E
F
:%G
*HH1 &JI
'#
"
K%L0$<B-B-B- -B-B-r,%"+&%Gs

MOMONN PBPBQ5Q$;RQ SU[ XT P V W X Y\] Z ]D;^ ] ];] ]
_MO`N ÙPBQW [ a a h7!i
Gjjklmn l o
M7N PBQ;b 3DUWQHUEDQN
fUb5c7V[e VW dUX[ e[ SUV P
ggg +RXVHEDQN
hO!i
m np lqj o
 SAP AG 2001

You maintain the business partner bank details and your own bank details centrally in a "bank data
pool".
The bank data you enter is maintained in the bank directory in Financial Accounting. You either enter
the data manually, or have it generated automatically. It can be accessed across the whole system.
Bank master data is contained in the bank directory. This includes the address data for the banks and
control data, such as the SWIFT code or the bank group.
The bank directory must contain the master data of all the banks that you require for payment
processing. This includes your own house banks and the banks of your business partners.
The bank data you have created (name, address, bank number ...) can then be used to maintain:
y 3DUWQHUEDQNV- bank details of your business partner
y +RXVHEDQNV- your own bank details with the corresponding link to Financial Accounting.

%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
&HQWUDO'DWD%DQN'HWDLOV
%XVLQHVVSDUWQHU$
&HQWUDOGDWD
&HQWUDOGDWD
%DQNGHWDLOV
&WU\ %DQN 3%DQN
%DQNNH\
DFFRXQW
%DQN '( $

t!
GDWD
'( %

'( &

u&%*:9*+v
 SAP AG 2001

You enter the bank details for the banks used by each business partner. This involves entering the
country, a relevant bank key, and a bank account.
Each set of bank details has a unique partner bank key (PBank).
Example: "B1" encodes the following: Business partner A has an account with the number 18889 at
Bank B. The bank key is 100 500 00.
When you maintain the bank details for the business partner, the system takes the bank name from the
bank data pool when you enter the country and bank key, if this data already exists.
If you enter a country and bank key in the bank details for a bank that does not yet exist in the bank data
pool, a dialog box for entering general bank data appears, enabling you to add this new bank to the bank
data pool.

+RXVH%DQNV0DVWHU'DWD
,'
w"&5;
%DQN
%DQN
GDWD %DQNFRXQWU\ '(
GDWD %DQNNH\
$GGUHVV
6
')xE&y
"zm %DQN 'W%DQN
5HJLRQ
+RXVHEDQNV
6WUHHW
&LW\
%UDQFK
&RQWUROGDWD
6:,)7FRGH
%DQNJURXS
5HODWHGEDQNDFFRXQWV

 SAP AG 2001

You create the banks with which your company has keeps its own current accounts as house banks.
When you maintain house banks, the system takes the bank name from the bank data pool when you
enter the country and the bank key, if this bank data already exists.
If you enter the country and the bank key for a house bank that does not yet exist in the data pool, a
dialog box for entering general bank data appears enabling you to add the house bank to the data pool.
You assign the accounts you keep with the house bank accordingly.

+RXVH%DQNV&UHDWH0DVWHU'DWD
6
'){E&
"|m *
&KDUW
RI
+RXVHEDQN '(8%$
DFFRXQWV
%DQNFRXQWU\ '(
%DQNNH\
/< 5"xI

7%
%DQNDFFRXQWGDWD
$FFRXQW,'*,581
%DQNDFFW */DFFRXQW
&XUUHQF\81,
 SAP AG 2001

You maintain the house banks in a particular company code. Each house bank has a specific house bank
ID.
For each house bank, you have to enter the bank accounts kept with that bank. Each bank account is
identified by an account ID you can assign yourself. This key is unique for each company code, house
bank, and account.
Short names are used to make it easier for you to enter your own bank details in transactions.
An internal general ledger account is usually kept in Financial Accounting for each account kept with the
house bank.
You can establish a link in the system between the (external) house bank account and the (internal)
general ledger account by assigning the accounts appropriately.

*HQHUDO/HGJHU$FFRXQWV
),JHQHUDOOHGJHU
6
')xE&*
"|m
*/DFFRXQW
&KDUWRIDFFRXQWV ,17
1DPH 'W%DQN

$FFRXQWFXUUHQF\ 81,

%DQNILQDQFHGHWDLOV
+RXVHEDQN 'HXED
$FFRXQW,' *,581
&DVK0JPWOHYHO )
 SAP AG 2001

The general ledger account you enter for maintaining the house bank first has to be created in FI as
master data. Here, you define the account currency details as well as the Cash Management level under
which the amounts posted to this account are displayed in Cash Management.

7UDQVDFWLRQ3D\PHQW'HWDLOV'DWD
&RQFOXVLRQRID
WUDQVDFWLRQZLWK
EXVLQHVVSDUWQHU$
3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
'}**)xE< s A 1 }**"'LU;;)~"E*
:%1
Company code 1000

Product type 51A Fixed-term deposit
Transaction type 100 Investment
D Curr. Effective FTyp House bk Acct ID Pmnt Payer/ee PBank

- UNI Deuba GIRUN
- UNI Deuba GIRUN
3RVWLQJ
 SAP AG 2002

The transaction and position management process enables you to enter payment details (i.e. the data
required for payment processing) in addition to the transaction data:
': Direction of the payment flow ("+": incoming payments; "-": outgoing payments).
+RXVHEN: House bank via which payments are processed in this transaction in the form of the defined
house bank ID.
$FFW,': Bank account at the house bank via which the payments in this transaction are processed, in the
form of the defined account ID.
3%DQN: Bank details (bank key and account) of the business partner via which the payments
in this transaction are processed in the form of the defined partner bank ID.
The system supports PXOWLOHYHOSD\PHQWPHWKRGV By entering a bank chain, you can process payments
via several banks. You can use up to 3 intermediary banks.

'HILQH&DVK0DQDJHPHQW$FFRXQW1DPH
,0*&DVK0DQDJHPHQW
&R&G &0DFFW */DFFW %DQNDFFRXQW 'HVFULSWLRQ

'%'ROODU 'HXED
'ROODUDFFRXQW

&DVKSRVLWLRQ*URXS
$FFRXQW && << <<

'%'ROODU

 SAP AG 2002

The amounts posted to the general ledger accounts are displayed in Cash Management under the cash
management level assigned in the FI account master data.
You can enter the (general ledger) account number as the relevant account in CM. Alternatively, if you
maintain a cash management name for the account, you can use this.
The cash management account name replaces the account number with a descriptive name. It is used for
all Cash Management transactions and reports (such as the cash position) instead of the account number.
Example. Amounts in G/L account 113150 are displayed in Cash Management:
y If the cash management account name has QRWbeen maintained:
Account Amount
113150 1,000
y If the cash management account name KDVbeen maintained:
Account Amount
DB Dollar 1,000

%DQNV8QLW6XPPDU\
z <RXKDYHVHHQKRZWRHQWHUEDQNGDWD
LQWKH6$36\VWHPPDQXDOO\<RXFDQ
DOVRLPSRUWEDQNGLUHFWRULHVIURPYDULRXV
FRXQWULHVLQWRWKHV\VWHPDXWRPDWLFDOO\
z ,I\RXFRQFOXGHILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQVZLWK
EXVLQHVVSDUWQHUVZLWKZKRP\RXGRQRWKDYH
DFXUUHQWDFFRXQWZKHUHSD\PHQWVFDQQRWEH
VHWWOHGLQWHUQDOO\\RXPXVWHQWHUWKHSDUWQHU
EDQNGHWDLOVLQWKHSDUWQHUPDVWHUUHFRUG
z <RXDOVRKDYHWRVHWXSWKHKRXVHEDQNV
DQGWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJEDQNDQGJHQHUDO
OHGJHUDFFRXQWVLQWKHV\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


%DQNV([HUFLVHV
8QLW%DQNV
7RSLF6HWWLQJXSEDQNVKRXVHEDQNV
• Setting up the entire banking environment in the SAP System
After configuring your business partners, you now want to define the
banks in the system. These include "general banks" and "house banks".
House banks are banks with which you have at least one current account.
1-1 Create the EDQNV AXX and BXX. These two banks are not house banks. They are
banks with which your business partners keep accounts. The bank keys must be 8
characters long. The banks are in Germany.
1-2 Change your business partner BPXX by assigning the bank details to this partner. Enter
AXX and BXX as the bank types. These entries are required for the payment details
and the payment program.
You have now assigned the external banks to your business partner.
1-3 You now want to set up the house banks for each company code.
Create the following JHQHUDOOHGJHUDFFRXQWV.
You create the accounts in the )LQDQFLDO$FFRXQWLQJmenu in the *HQHUDO/HGJHU

section.
Enter your company code and the account number, and copy the relevant account from
company code TR00. Save your entries:
116100 Giro/UNI 116300 Giro/USD
116105 Clearing/UNI 116305 Clearing/USD
116113 Fixed-term dep./UNI 116114 Fixed-term dep./USD
1-4 Define the CXX bank as a KRXVHEDQN with the bank accounts GIRUN/UNI (116100)
and GIRUS/USD (116300).

1-5 Create a fixed-term deposit with business partner BPXX. Check the payment details.
Initially, these fields are not filled. However, you can enter the payment details for the
transaction manually.

%DQNV6ROXWLRQV
8QLW%DQNV
7RSLF6HWWLQJXSEDQNVKRXVHEDQNV
1-1 Create the banks AXX and BXX:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
'DWDÖ%DQNVÖ&UHDWH

(QWHUWKHEDQNFRXQWU\DQGDQFKDUDFWHUEDQNNH\RI\RXUFKRLFH7KHQHQWHU
WKHDGGUHVVGHWDLOVLQFOXGLQJWKHEDQNQDPH%DQN$;;
1-2 Maintain the bank details for business partner BPXX:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
'DWDÖ6$3%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUÖ%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUÖ&KDQJH

%3UROH 75&RXQWHUSDUW\
7DESDJH 3D\PHQWWUDQVDFWLRQV

(QWHUDEDQN,'VXFKDV%DQN$;;WKHEDQNFRXQWU\WKHFKDUDFWHUEDQN
NH\DQGDQH[WHUQDOEDQNDFFRXQWQXPEHUWKDW\RXDVVLJQ\RXUVHOI6HWWKH
&ROOHFWLRQDXWKRUL]DWLRQLQGLFDWRU''

<RXKDYHQRZDVVLJQHGERWKQHZEDQNVWR\RXUQHZEXVLQHVVSDUWQHU7KHEDQNV
DSSHDUXQGHUWKHEDQNGHWDLOVIRUWKHSDUWQHU
7KHVHHQWULHVDUHUHTXLUHGZKHQ\RXLQWHQGWRPDNHDFWLYHSD\PHQWVWRWKH
EXVLQHVVSDUWQHUXVLQJWKHSD\PHQWSURJUDP

1-3 Create general ledger accounts:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
Ö)LQDQFLDO$FFRXQWLQJÖ*HQHUDO/HGJHUÖ0DVWHU5HFRUGVÖ,QGLYLGXDO
3URFHVVLQJÖ,Q&RPSDQ\&RGH

8VHWKHDFFRXQWVVSHFLILHGDVDUHIHUHQFHE\FKRRVLQJWKH&UHDWHZLWKUHIHUHQFH
SXVKEXWWRQ<RXPD\QHHGWRGHOHWHWKHDOWHUQDWLYHDFFRXQWQXPEHUV,I\RXGR
VRFKHFNFKDQJHWKHHQWULHVIRUWKHEDQN,'DQGDFFRXQW,'
1-4 Define house bank with bank accounts:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
'DWDÖ+RXVH%DQNVÖ(GLW+RXVH%DQNVDQG%DQN$FFRXQWV

(QWHUWKHKRXVHEDQN&;;DQGWKHEDQNFRXQWU\'(IROORZHGE\DEDQNNH\,I
\RXHQWHUDEDQNNH\WKDWDOUHDG\H[LVWVLQWKH6$36\VWHPWKHGDWDIRUWKLVEDQN
NH\ZLOODSSHDUDVDGHIDXOW,ILWGRHVQRWDOUHDG\H[LVWHQWHUQHZDGGUHVVGDWD
IRU\RXUQHZKRXVHEDQN

Ö%DQN$FFRXQW

(QWHUWKHDFFRXQW,'V*,581DQG*,586UHVSHFWLYHO\DQGDFRUUHVSRQGLQJ
GHVFULSWLRQ<RXFDQHQWHUDQH[WHUQDODFFRXQWQXPEHURI\RXUFKRLFHLQWKHEDQN
DFFRXQWILHOGDQG81,RU86'LQWKHFXUUHQF\ILHOG,QWKH*/DFFRXQWILHOG
HQWHUWKHDFFRXQWRU
1-5 Create a fixed-term deposit with business partner BPXX:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
0RQH\0DUNHWÖ7UDGLQJÖ)L[HG7HUP'HSRVLWÖ&UHDWH

(QWHU\RXUGDWD
7DE3D\PHQWGHWDLOV

7KHUHDUHQRSD\PHQWGHWDLOV+RZHYHU\RXFDQHQWHUWKHVHGHWDLOVXVLQJWKH)
SRVVLEOHHQWULHVIXQFWLRQ,QWKHQH[WXQLW\RXZLOOOHDUQKRZWRVHWXSWKHV\VWHP
VRWKDWWKLVGDWDDSSHDUVDXWRPDWLFDOO\

&RQWHQWV
z Standing instructions - Authorizations

- Payment details
- Correspondence
- Derived flows
z Currencies
z Reasons for reversal
 SAP AG 2001


7UDQVDFWLRQDQG3RVLWLRQ0DQDJHPHQW
3UHSDUDWLRQ8QLW2EMHFWLYHV
$WWKHFRQFOXVLRQRIWKLVXQLW\RXZLOOEHDEOH
WR
z Outline the necessary preparations for transaction

and position management in the SAP system and
make the corresponding settings
 SAP AG 2001


2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
%DQNV
,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


3UHSDUDWLRQ%XVLQHVV6FHQDULR
z <RXFRQFOXGHILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQVZLWKWKH
VDPHEXVLQHVVSDUWQHURQDUHJXODUEDVLVDQG
ZDQWWKHYDOXHVIRUFHUWDLQILHOGVWREH
SURSRVHGDXWRPDWLFDOO\E\WKHV\VWHP
z 7RGRWKLV\RXGHILQHVWDQGLQJLQVWUXFWLRQV
IRUSD\PHQWGHWDLOVFRUUHVSRQGHQFHDQG
FHUWDLQGHULYHGIORZV
z <RXDOVRZDQWWRHQWHUFXUUHQF\PDVWHUGDWD
DQGGHILQHFHUWDLQUHYHUVDOUHDVRQV
 SAP AG 2001


6WDQGLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV2YHUYLHZ

3D\PHQWGHWDLOV &RUUHVSRQGHQFH 'HULYHGIORZV
$VVLJQ $VVLJQ $VVLJQ
+RXVHEDQNDQG &RQILUPDWLRQ 'HULYDWLRQSURFHGXUH

UHODWHGEDQNDFFRXQW 3ULQW
%XVLQHVVSDUWQHU )D[
EDQNGHWDLOV 6:,)7,'RF
(PDLO
&RXQWHUFRQILUPDWLRQ
 SAP AG 2001

Payment details contain all the relevant information for payment processing, including your own (house
bank) account and the business partner’s bank details (as required).
You can maintain different sets of payment details for the partner for each currency.
In the standing instructions, you assign the payment details to the transactions for which these settings
are relevant. You can assign the payment details at different levels (contract type, product category,
transaction type).
When you conclude a transaction with business partner A, the system automatically inserts the payment
details defined for that particular transaction in the standing instructions. This saves you from making
the entries manually.
The standing instructions for correspondence control how external correspondence with a certain
business partner is processed.
You assign the correspondence medium to be used for this business partner (print, fax, e-mail, IDoc,
SWIFT) to the various transactions at the required level (from the contract type down to the transaction
type). These entries are compulsory if you want to generate correspondence for your business partner.
You can use derived flows in the money market, foreign exchange, derivatives and securities areas to
simplify the calculation of amounts that depend on other flows (such as tax amounts). To generate
derived flows, you must assign a derivation procedure to the relevant partner.

%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU6WDQGLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
3D\PHQW'HWDLOV
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU6WDQGLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV3D\PHQW'HWDLOV
&XUUHQF\ 3D\PHQW +RXVH $FFRXQW
&'( GHWDLOV,' EDQN ,'
81, 'HXED *,581
86' 'HXED *,586

$VVLJQ
3D\PHQW
&)0 GHWDLOV,'
!"#
0RQH\0DUNHW
)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW
$ )L[HGWHUPGHS
,QYHVWPHQW [
$% [ $%
%RUURZLQJ
 SAP AG 2001

The system uses the house bank and account ID defined in the standing instructions for the business
partner to identify the relevant bank account for posting.
Once you have created the payment details, remember to ASSIGN them to transactions.
This allows you to direct the postings for different products or payment directions to separate accounts.
The system supports PXOWLSOHOHYHO payment methods. By entering a bank chain, you can make payments
via several banks. Up to 3 intermediate banks are supported.

6WDQGLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV3D\PHQW'HWDLOV
BP bank details BP bank details

Bank Bank
Account Account
$VVLJQHG
House bank House bank
House bank account House bank account
%3$
6WDQGLQJLQVWUXFWLRQV6,
3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
&RQFOXVLRQRI
WUDQVDFWLRQZLWK
3URSRVDOIURP6,
EXVLQHVVSDUWQHU$
Entered in
transaction Payment details in the
PDQXDOO\ transaction
3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
3RVWLQJ3D\PHQW
 SAP AG 2001

Example: Standing instructions for payment details:

y Standing instructions for payment details are QRW maintained: The details for posting and payment
have to be entered manually in the transaction.
y Standing instructions for payment details DUH maintained: When a transaction is created, the system
proposes the payment details that have been assigned to that particular type of transaction for the
partner.

7UDQVDFWLRQ&RUUHVSRQGHQFH
)+*-,/.10 2 34/5 0 *6, )7*6,/.10 2 345 0 *-,

([WHUQDO ,QWHUQDO
)D[
([DPSOH ([DPSOH
&RQILUPDWLRQVYLDID[ 'HDOLQJVOLS
HPDLO6:,)7
 SAP AG 2001

Correspondence is used to document and reconcile the transactions concluded.

You can define internal correspondence types (such as dealing slips) and external correspondence types
(such as confirmations). By performing a correspondence run, you can confirm all the financial
transactions you have concluded with a partner in a given period. You can output the correspondence
data in various ways: print, send a fax directly from the system, e-mail, and IDoc. To send e-mails, you
must set up the communication interface SAPconnect. For money market and foreign exchange
transactions you can generate SWIFT files MT320 (fixed-term deposits) and MT300 (forex). A user exit
allows you to use the FX Match function for outgoing confirmations (MT320 only).
You can control the FRUUHVSRQGHQFHW\SHVIRUH[WHUQDOFRUUHVSRQGHQFH in the SDUWQHUVSHFLILF standing
instructions for correspondence. Control of internal correspondence types is independent of the business
partner.
In Customizing for the product types, transaction types, and activities you control when (in other words,
at what point) correspondence is generated. You can also specify whether correspondence should be
generated automatically when a transaction is created, changed, or reversed (in other words, as soon as a
transaction is saved). The system keeps a record of the correspondence that has been created in the
financial transaction.
The system also keeps a record of the confirmation status in the transaction. This includes information
about when the confirmation was sent/received, the relevant activity, the clerk, the form used, and the
output type of incoming or outgoing confirmations.

&RUUHVSRQGHQFH&XVWRPL]LQJ
'HILQHFRUUHVSRQGHQFHW\SHV
8 9 /:
9;
!
<=

>?
!@A A

&RQILUPDWLRQ
B

CD
:
D+ !9A
E;
!
FG=
H!@I J KL9 / !DM:!@I J

N
O C
DC
7J
CD+!9A
9;
!
P9
Q1Q Q

'HILQHFRUUHVSRQGHQFHDFWLYLWLHV
RS+TVU-W7XZY\[]SM^7_ hjifiZi
SX-_6Y W+CA_-:MMSLT
`+a6b-c `7k1l]mMn6oAp]p bqc6rtsvu-wtr xvxvyjz g 7) 45{ lMk|k|}/p b]c6r ~ *Z2 3 g 5 A*62 )7)+*-,/.
dfe7g ~ 0 AAv 5 j2 3Fv z *vv0 5|jfA5 f2 ,f4j e e Aje ~ZxZZ )7 ~Z ++ g6
dfe7g ~ 0 AAv 5 j2 3Fv z *vv0 5|jfA5 f2 ,f4j e e /A ~ZxZZ6 g Z gv
dfe7g ~ 0 AAv 5 j2 3Fv z *vv0 5|jfA5 f2 ,f4j e e/e /fe ~ZxZZ )7 ~Z ++ g6
dfe7g ~ 0 AAv 5 j2 3Fv z *vv0 5|jfA5 f2 ,f4j e e/e /A ~ZxZZ6 g Z gv

&KDQJHPHVVDJHFRQWURO
Example: Transaction not yet confirmed and counterconfirmed
 SAP AG 2001

You define the relevant correspondence types (such as confirmation, dealing slip) in Customizing for the
relevant area under )XQFWLRQV!&RUUHVSRQGHQFH!'HILQH&RUUHVSRQGHQFH7\SHV.
The ,QWHUQDOFRUUHVSRQGHQFHW\SH indicator determines whether the correspondence type should be
external (allowing partner-specific settings in the standing instructions) or internal (independent of the
partner).
You then define the correspondence activities for the respective area and company code. In this
Customizing step you also specify whether counterconfirmation is required.
You can change the correspondence forms using the SAP word processing program SAPscript. If you
change the existing forms in SAPscript and save them under a new name, you must maintain the new
forms in the Customizing step 'HILQH&RUUHVSRQGHQFH$FWLYLWLHV
Message control enables you to influence transaction processing. You can set up the system to ignore
messages or checks depending on the user, or to block further processing by defining error messages (E-
Message).

&RUUHVSRQGHQFH
&'¡(
8 9:
9;
!
<=
C
AD &RUUHVSRQGHQFH
&)0
8 !9¢ Q¤£ 1¦¥7 O9§ |¥¨ >©!ª«C"¬ D
$VVLJQ 0RQH\0DUNHW
)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW
$)L[HGWHUPGHS
,QYHVWPHQW
%RUURZLQJ
'HSRVLWDWQRWLFH
%&DOOPRQH\
,QYHVWPHQW
%RUURZLQJ
 SAP AG 2001

You control the (external) correspondence with a particular business partner by defining standing
instructions for correspondence.
In the standing instructions for correspondence, you assign correspondence media and parameters to the
external correspondence types for a business partner. You can make this assignment at several levels:
contract type, product category, ... down to the transaction type.
You can choose between different correspondence media. You can print the forms, or send external
correspondence directly from the R/3 system (for example as a fax, or in SWIFT format).
Correspondence parameters:
Correspondence is automatically sent to the business partner’s standard address. If you want to use a
different address for the partner, enter the correct key in the $OWHUQDWLYHDGGUHVV field.
If you require counterconfirmation from your business partner, set the &&RQI indicator.
(Prerequisite: Your Customizing settings allow automatic correspondence)
In the financial transaction, the system keeps a record of the correspondence that has been created.

7UDQVDFWLRQ'HULYHG)ORZV
z <RXFDQGHILQHGHULYDWLRQUXOHVIRUFHUWDLQIORZVWRJHQHUDWH
QHZGHSHQGHQWIORZV
z )ORZ,QWHUHVW 81,
>©?
A JA/ 9/D
)ORZ7D[ 81,
)ORZ7D[ 81,
 SAP AG 2002

You use derivation procedures to generate certain flows automatically. These flows are calculated on the
basis of other financial flows in the system.
When you process the original flow, the system generates the dependent (or derived) flows
automatically.
Example: A tax of 30% (tax 1) is deducted from the nominal interest (flow type), and a tax of 5.5% (tax
2) is deducted from tax 1 (in other words, 1.65% of the nominal interest amount).
The interest condition in the transaction generates an interest flow with the flow type 1200. At the same
time, the system adds the following flows to the cash flow on the basis of the derivation procedure.
y Tax 1 (flow type 1800)
y Tax 2 (flow type 1801)
You can then process all the flow types (original and derived). For example, you could offset the
corresponding amounts when you post the interest.

'HULYHG)ORZV
1. If necessary, define a FDOFXODWLRQSURFHGXUHand assign it to

the derivation rule
2. Define a GHULYDWLRQSURFHGXUHwith a corresponding

derivation rule:
• 3HUFHQWDJHUDWH or
• &DOFXODWLRQSURFHGXUHVHH
3. Assign the derivation procedure to the business partner:

6WDQGLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV'HULYHG)ORZV
 SAP AG 2001

You can generate derived flow types on the basis of flow types. One example of this would be to create
tax flows for nominal interest automatically. These tax flows would then appear in the cash flow, and
would enable you to display the net cash flows in Cash Management.
You can use calculation procedures to define the derived flow amount, which is dependent on the
currency DQGthe original flow amount. This enables you to have the derived flows calculated
differently, depending on the original amount.
Example: 15 EUR commission up to 20,000 EUR, 1.5% commission for amounts above 20,000 EUR).
You set up the structure individually for each currency.
If the derived flow is always the same percentage of the original flow, regardless of the currency, you
can enter the percentage rate directly when you define the derivation rule. In this case, you do not need
to define a calculation procedure.

'HULYHG)ORZV&XVWRPL]LQJ
'HILQH&DOFXODWLRQ3URFHGXUHIRU'HULYHG)ORZV
3URFHGXUH
&XUUHQF\'HSHQGHQW5XOHV 'HILQHZKHWKHUWKHDPRXQWLVDPD[LPXPRU
PLQLPXPDPRXQW
$PRXQW'HSHQGHQW5XOHV 0D[LPXPPLQLPXPDPRXQW
&DOFXODWLRQIL[HGDPRXQWRUSHUFHQWDJH
6SHFLI\SHUFHQWDJHRUDPRXQW
'HILQH'HULYDWLRQ3URFHGXUHVDQG5XOHV
'HULYDWLRQ3URFHGXUH1DPHRIWKHGHULYDWLRQSURFHGXUH
'HULYDWLRQ5XOHV
2ULJLQDOIORZ
(IIHFWLYHIURP
)ORZW\SH
'LUHFWLRQ
'HULYHGIORZ
)ORZW\SH
'LUHFWLRQ
2SWWRXVHFDOFXODWLRQSURFHGXUHRUSHUFHQWDJHUDWH
6SHFLI\WKHUHOHYDQWSURFHGXUHRUSHUFHQWDJHUDWH
6WDQGLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
'HULYHGIORZV$VVLJQGHULYDWLRQSURFHGXUH
 SAP AG 2002

In Customizing you first define a FDOFXODWLRQSURFHGXUH

y Under &XUUHQF\'HSHQGHQW5XOHV you define for each currency whether the amounts are maximum or
minimum amounts.
y Under $PRXQW'HSHQGHQW5XOHV you set the limits and specify whether the derived flow is a fixed
amount, or whether it is calculated on a percentage basis.
This enables you to set different charges according to the currency.
Example: The charge is 10 EUR, as long as the original flow does not exceed 10,000 EUR. If the
amount exceeds 10,000 EUR, the charge goes up to 20 EUR.
If the currency of the original flow is USD, the charge is always 25 EUR, regardless of the original
flow amount.
You must define GHULYDWLRQUXOHV for each derivation procedure. To do so, you specify the following:
y Initiating flow type (original flow)
y Direction of the initiating flow
y Derived flow type
y Direction of the derived flow type
y Basis for detemining derived flow amount - calculation procedure or fixed percentage rate
y Derived flow amount, as a percentage of the original flow or on the basis of the calculation procedure

'HULYHG)ORZV
&'¡(
&)0 'HULYDWLRQSURFHGXUH
0RQH\0DUNHW
$VVLJQ
)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW
$)L[HGWHUPGHS ¨@%
,QYHVWPHQW
%RUURZLQJ
'HSRVLWDWQRWLFH
%&DOOPRQH\
,QYHVWPHQW
%RUURZLQJ
 SAP AG 2001

In the application you specify when a particular derivation procedure should apply for a certain business
partner. You can assign the derivation procedure at different levels (from the contract type down to the
transaction type).
If you create a transaction with a business partner, and have assigned a derivation procedure to this
partner at the corresponding level, the system generates additional flows on the basis of the derivation
rules you have defined.

&XUUHQF\0DVWHU'DWD
&XUUHQWUDWH
5DWHW\SHV 0 0LGGOHUDWH
* %LGUDWH
7UDQVODWLRQ )URP7R7UDQVUDWLR
UDWLRV (8586'
&855(1&<
0DLQWDLQ 57\SH)URP7R5DWH
H[FKDQJHUDWHV (85;(8586'
&XUUHQF\ &DO,'
&DO,'
&DOHQGDU (85 (8
/HDGLQJ /HDGFXUU
/HDGFXUU )ROOFXUU
)ROOFXUU
FXUUHQFLHV (85 86'
 SAP AG 2001

You use the rate type to define exchange rates for different purposes. This allows you to enter various
rates for the same date.
The system uses the rate type "M" for currency translation when it posts and clears documents. This rate
type must be defined in the currency master data.
The translation ratios denote the measurement units for the exchange rates.
Example: An exchange rate from EUR to USD with the above exchange ratio means that 1 EUR costs x
USD.
In the productive system, you call up the Customizing tables for maintaining exchange rates from the
application (menu: %DVLF)XQFWLRQV!0DUNHW'DWD0DQDJHPHQW!0DQXDO0DUNHW'DWD(QWU\!
&XUUHQF\!(QWHU([FKDQJH5DWHV).
You enter the current exchange rate specifying the rate type, the currency pair and the valid from date.
CFM-specific settings affect the calendar and the leading currencies:
y Calendar: You assign a calendar to each currency. When you create a new transaction, the system uses
the calendar assigned to the transaction currency as the basis for the working day check.
y When you enter an exchange rate in a transaction, the system uses the definitions for the leading
currency and following currency to read the rate correctly.
Example: An exchange rate of "1.02" can be read as 1.02 USD for 1 EUR (leading currency EUR,
following currency USD), or as the price in EUR for 1 USD.

5HDVRQVIRU5HYHUVDO
&)05HYHUVDOUHDVRQV
5HYHUVDOGXHWRSURFHVVLQJHUURU
5HYHUVDOGXHWRFXVWRPL]LQJHUURU
0
Company
5HYHUVDOGXHWRFRQGLWLRQDGMXVWPHQWV
'RFXPHQW
5HYHUVDOIRURWKHUUHDVRQV

 SAP AG 2002

The reversal function resets the last change made to the transaction (in other words, the last transaction
activity recorded by the system).
To reverse posted flows for a financial transaction, you must first reverse the transaction activity. The
system then earmarks the posted flows to indicate that the corresponding documents have to be reversed.
You have to define the possible reversal reasons in Customizing.
The FI reversal reasons are relevant for reversing posted documents.

3UHSDUDWLRQ8QLW6XPPDU\
z 7RUHGXFH\RXUZRUNORDG\RXKDYHFUHDWHG
SDUWQHUVSHFLILFVWDQGLQJLQVWUXFWLRQV
z <RXKDYHPDLQWDLQHGWKHUHOHYDQWFXUUHQF\
WDEOHVIRUIRUHLJQH[FKDQJHWUDQVDFWLRQV
z <RXKDYHGHILQHGYDULRXVUHDVRQVIRUUHYHUVLQJ
LQGLYLGXDODFWLYLWLHV
 SAP AG 2002


([HUFLVHV
8QLW7UDQVDFWLRQDQG3RVLWLRQ0DQDJHPHQW3UHSDUDWLRQ
7RSLF %XVLQHVV3DUWQHU6WDQGLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
3D\PHQW'HWDLOV
• Preparation activities for transaction and position management
You can simplify the entry process by letting the system propose certain
values when you enter transactions. To do this, you defineVWDQGLQJ
LQVWUXFWLRQV.
1-1 Create payment details (VWDQGLQJLQVWUXFWLRQV) for your business partner BPXX for the
currency UNI.
To do this, enter SD\PHQWGHWDLOVfor the SAP business partner: You want to make
payments from your current account at house bank CXX using payment requests. The
payment details ID is I-XX and applies for all payments resulting from money market
and foreign exchange transactions. The payer/payee is the business partner itself. You
can choose the partner bank (AXX or BXX). You want to make outgoing payments by
bank transfer, and collect incoming payments by direct debit.
Remember to assign the payment details to incoming and outgoing payments. You can
do this by clicking on the &KRRVHGHWDLO button (magnifying glass) and then choosing
the $VVLJQPHQW tab, or by clicking on the $VVLJQ button directly.
1-2 Create another fixed-term deposit with your business partner BPXX. Check the
payment details.

([HUFLVHV
7RSLF+RXVH%DQNVDQG%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
• Creating a house bank as a business partner and making the relevant

settings
Often, a house bank is also a business partner. If this is the case, you
create the bank as a house bank, and then create it as a business partner.
If you want to conclude transactions with your house bank, you must create your house
bank as a business partner.
2-1 Create a partner for your own house bank. Use the SAP business partner name "CXX".
(Grouping G-XX or TR02, role "Counterparty")
2-2 You intend to conclude money market, foreign exchange and derivatives transactions
with your house bank. Set up the authorizations in the application.
2-3 Define the payment details (VWDQGLQJLQVWUXFWLRQV) for your new business partner CXX
- for the currencies UNI and USD.
(Standing instructions for payment details: Since the house bank will debit your
payments from your account itself, the entries for the partner bank and payment
method are not relevant. Relevant fields: Currency, house bank ID, and account ID.
Assignment for incoming/outgoing payments).

([HUFLVHV
&RUUHVSRQGHQFH
• Defining other standing instructions
Once you have made the correspondence settings in Customizing, you

need to define the correspondence details for each business partner.
3-1 Set up standing instructions for FRUUHVSRQGHQFH with your business partners BPXX and
CXX for money market and foreign exchange transactions. Make sure that you define
the 3ULQWHU as the only correspondence medium (3ULQFLSDOFRUUHVSRQGHQFHPHGLXP).
You can make the other settings as you choose.

([HUFLVHV
7RSLF%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU2YHUYLHZ
• Obtaining an overview of the settings for a business partner
What entries have you made for your business partner?
4-1 Finally, take another overall look at your business partners BPXX and CXX. Call up
the master data, role data, address data, credit standing data, and bank data. Also look
at the standing instructions.
You have now entered all the necessary business partner data.

6ROXWLRQV
3D\PHQW'HWDLOV
1-1 Create payment details (standing instructions) for your business partner BPXX:
$SSOLFDWLRQ

&KDQJH
5ROH&RXQWHUSDUW\&RPSDQ\FRGH75;;
7DESDJH3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
(175,(6
$OWHUQDWLYHO\\RXFDQJRGLUHFWO\WRWKHWUDQVDFWLRQIRUFKDQJLQJWKHVWDQGLQJ
LQVWUXFWLRQVIRUSD\PHQWGHWDLOV
)LHOGQDPHRUGDWDW\SH 9DOXHV
&XUUHQF\ 81,
3D\PHQWGHWDLOV,' ,;;
+RXVHEDQN,' &;;
$FFRXQW,' *,581
3D\HUHH %3;;
3DUWQHUEDQN $;;
3D\PHQWUHTXHVW 6HWLQGLFDWRU
3D\PHQWPHWKRG (8

2QFH\RXKDYHHQWHUHGDVHWRISD\PHQWGHWDLOVPDNHWKHDVVLJQPHQWIRU
LQFRPLQJDQGRXWJRLQJSD\PHQWVEXWWRQ$VVLJQ


1-2 Create a fixed-term deposit with your business partner BPXX:
$SSOLFDWLRQ

(175,(6
7DESDJH3D\PHQWGHWDLOV

7KHSD\PHQWGHWDLOVKDYHEHHQHQWHUHGDXWRPDWLFDOO\7KHVHDUHSURSRVDOVWKDW
FDQEHRYHUZULWWHQE\WKHXVHU

6ROXWLRQV
7RSLF+RXVH%DQNVDQG%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
2-1 Create a house bank as an SAP business partner:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
(QWHUWKHEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUQDPH&;;WKHJURXSLQJ75DQGWKHUROH
&RXQWHUSDUW\1H[WHQWHUWKHGDWDIRU\RXUQHZEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUVWUHHWSRVWDO
FRGHFLW\DQGZKHUHDSSOLFDEOHWKHODQJXDJH6DYH\RXUHQWULHV
2-2 Assign authorizations to your house bank (business partner)
$SSOLFDWLRQ
7DE$XWKRUL]DWLRQV

$VVLJQWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJWUDQVDFWLRQDXWKRUL]DWLRQV
2-3 Standing instructions for payment details:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
7DE3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
)LHOGQDPHRUGDWDW\SH 9DOXHV
&XUUHQF\ 81,DQG86'
3D\PHQWGHWDLOV,' LQHDFKFDVH
+RXVHEDQN,' &;;
$FFRXQW,' *,581DQG*,586
2QFH\RXKDYHHQWHUHGDVHWRISD\PHQWGHWDLOVPDNHWKHDVVLJQPHQWIRU
LQFRPLQJDQGRXWJRLQJSD\PHQWVEXWWRQ$VVLJQ

6ROXWLRQV
&RUUHVSRQGHQFH
3-1 Standing instructions for correspondence:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
&KDQJH

7DE&RUUHVSRQGHQFH

&RUUHVSRQGHQFHW\SH±([WHUQDOFRQILUPDWLRQ
,QHDFKFDVHVHWWKH3ULQWHULQGLFDWRU

6ROXWLRQV
7RSLF%XVLQHVV3DUWQHU2YHUYLHZ
4-1 Overall view of business partners BPXX and CXX:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
&KDQJH

5ROH&RXQWHUSDUW\

&DOOXSWKHPDVWHUGDWDUROHGDWDDGGUHVVGDWDFUHGLWVWDQGLQJGDWDDQGEDQN
GDWD$OVRKDYHDORRNDWWKHVWDQGLQJLQVWUXFWLRQV/RRNDWWKHGLIIHUHQFHV
EHWZHHQWKHVHWZREXVLQHVVSDUWQHUV
%3;;WRZKLFK\RXDFWLYHO\PDNHSD\PHQWVDQG&;;ZKLFKLVDOVRDKRXVH
EDQN


&RQWHQWV
z Product types/categories
z Transaction types/categories
z Activity categories
z Processing categories
z Flow types/categories
z Condition types/categories
z Update types
z Cash flow
 SAP AG 2001


6WUXFWXUH8QLW2EMHFWLYHV
WR
z Recognize the main Customizing terms and make

the corresponding settings
 SAP AG 2001


2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
%DQNV
,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


6WUXFWXUH%XVLQHVV6FHQDULR
z 2QFH\RXKDYHFRQILJXUHGWKHEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUV
\RXQHHGWRPDNHWKH&XVWRPL]LQJVHWWLQJVIRUWKH
UHVSHFWLYHILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQVEHIRUH\RXFDQ
HQWHUWUDQVDFWLRQVLQWKHV\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


([DPSOH&UHDWH)LQDQFLDO7UDQVDFWLRQ

!#" %$& ''( 1 2, " 3 4 ) #5768:9
)*"
+, '.- %
/'( ,&'' "
+ ;'<- =
! " '0
" $> $'?+,&@,BA8
C
&- DE- ;;'.- =

+
! " '?D0=F -
A$+-
;++/' "
+, 'E- =
H " & "(I 2- 3-J

,G =
' " '
3&'? "
F
$,> " ++- G=
&B
;'
)="
+ ;'E- =
 SAP AG 2001

On the basis of the liquidity situation (CM) and risk situation (MRA) you conclude certain transactions
with your business partners, taking into account the predefined risk and revenue targets.
Example: You have excess liquidity, and invest this amount as a fixed-term deposit with business partner
Bank X.
You enter transactions on the basis of the transaction architecture settings in Customizing (product types,
transaction types, ...) and certain application data, such as the information entered for the business
partner (address, bank details, ...).
You create transactions with a business partner in acompany code for a certain product type and a
specific transaction type

&XVWRPL]LQJ6WUXFWXUH
0RQH\0DUNHW)RUH['HULYDWLYHV6HFXULWLHV
3URGXFWFDW 7UDQVDFWLRQFDW )ORZFDW &DOFXODWLRQFDW

$FWLYLW\FDW &RQGLWLRQFDW
3URFHVVLQJFDW
6<67(0/(9(/
3URGXFWW\SH 7UDQVDFWQW\SH &RQGLWLRQW\SH )ORZW\SH
8SGDWHW\SH
86(5/(9(/
2QO\PRQH\PDUNHWIRUH[DQGGHULYDWLYHV
 SAP AG 2001


3URGXFW&DWHJRULHV3URGXFW7\SHV
3URGXFWFDWHJRU\
W T 2- 3, K 'L " X &+- ' Z P' &C
1 2, " - G=
/ 3&&@
,G& U
1 T 7 I 2F "
1Y Z R[ \, A]*
,
U U
6<67(0/(9(/
3URGXFWW\SH
K 2 - 3, & +K -'L' " K 2, " B-;G=+
S'<- +S'0+'0&C &C
K
K 2,2, "" 3M ;3 'N "
F
K 7 I 2F -J
'P " "
F
O
3
K
'N " +' " 'PQ+;RS K 22 F- 3, ;'N "-J
'N " ;+ '
K $ "E"
T/+;RQ K >,=
,K VVV
K
U
86(5/(9(/
 SAP AG 2001

Product categories cover the basic types of financial borrowing and investment transactions and
represent a classification of financial instruments. Product categories are predefined in the system, apply
to all company codes, and cannot be modified by the user.
Product types represent a refinement of the product categories at user level and, unlike the product
categories, they can be defined by the user. When you define a product type, you specify the business
framework that applies to financial transactions of this product type. A product type is assigned to just
one product category, but it is possible to have several product types that refer to the same product
category. You create and process your own financial transactions on the basis of product types.
You use product types to:
y Assign various processing methods
y Make report selections
y Assign various structure characteristics
y Assign various valuation parameters (such as different yield curves) in the Market Risk Analyzer.

3URGXFW&DWHJRULHV3URGXFW7\SHV([DPSOHV
)LQDQFLDOLQVWUXPHQWV 3URGXFWFDWHJRULHV 3URGXFWW\SHV
0RQH\PDUNHW )L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW)7'RYHUQLJKWPRQH\

'HSRVLWDWQRWLFH)7'WLPHGHSRVLWV
&RPPHUFLDO3DSHU
&DVKIORZWUDQVDFWLRQ
)RUHLJQH[FKDQJH )RUH[)RUH[(;7(51$/
,17(51$/
'HULYDWLYHV &DS)ORRU&DS
)ORRU
6ZDS,QWHUHVWUDWHVZDS
&XUUHQF\VZDS
)5$)5$
)XWXUHV&XUUHQF\IXWXUHV
/LVWHGRSWLRQV 6WRFNRSWLRQ1RWUHOHDVHG
,QGH[RSWLRQ1RWUHOHDVHG
27&2SWLRQ6ZDSWLRQ
&XUUHQF\RSWLRQ27&
&XUUHQF\EDUULHURSWLRQ
,5*
 SAP AG 2001

Product categories are predefined in the system. You can define your own product types for the
individual product categories.

'HILQH3URGXFW7\SH([DPSOH)RUH[
3URGXFWW\SH $
7H[W )RUH[H[WHUQDO
3URGXFWFDW)RUHLJQH[FKDQJH

6HWWOHPHQW
 SAP AG 2001

Product types represent the financial transactions that are used in your company. Examples of product
types in the money market area are fixed-term deposits or deposits at notice. If you do not want to use
the standard product types delivered with the system, you can define product types of your own. This
enables you to carry out different evaluations or to specify different processing rules for internal and
external transactions. Product types contain information about the structure characteristics.
When you define a product type, you specify the business framework that applies to financial
transactions of this product type.
You use product types as a basis for creating and managing your financial transactions and for managing
your positions.
The 6HWWOHPHQW indicator controls whether the underlying transaction is exercised physically when you
exercise the option, or whether a cash settlement is made.

'HILQH3URGXFW7\SH([DPSOH&XUUHQF\2SWLRQ
Product type $

Text &XUUHQF\RSWLRQ27&
Prod. category OTC options
HQ'E- %
I 2$'.$ "
6 $&> "*"
,G `
, " F -
,G
'('.F ,B
'
^Q$,&'N;'E- =
/'( Y !#" =$, ''a, 1 T
'('.F
'=B;'<@& )*"
+ '.
Q'N
3 " &- + _'(, Y 6 =V$
, " F %-J
,G&+
HQ'E- %
;;'L G "
 SAP AG 2001

When you define product types, the data you enter differs according to the financial instrument you use.
For example, when you define product type "Currency option", you have to enter data in the fields for
the underlying transaction.

)LQDQFLDO7UDQVDFWLRQ7\SHV
3URGXFWFDW 7UDQVDFWLRQFDW
W T 2- 3, K 'L " c
;b&;+'LB
'
&+- ' Y A] "<" ,R/-J
,G
1 2, " ;3 2, " 3
1 T 7 I 2F " ' "
+ '<- %
1Y Z R[ U

U
6<67(0/(9(/
3URGXFWW\SH 7UDQVDFWLRQW\SH
K 2 - 3, & +K -'L' " K A];
b,"E" + 'PR_B-a

G '
K &'
K 2,2, "" 3M ;3 'N "
F K 2 " RS "
K 7 I 2F -J
'P " "
F
O
3 K ! $ " &@ +
K
'N " +' " 'PQ+;RS K F
K $ "E"
T/+;RQ K R:
K K
U U
86(5/(9(/
 SAP AG 2001

A financial transaction type determines the type of transaction you can execute with a specific product
type. It also controls the transaction and position management process.
Examples of financial transaction types are "investment" and "borrowing" transactions for time deposits,
or "spot" or "forward" transactions for foreign exchange.
You can use the basic transaction types delivered with the system, or refine these according to your
company’s requirements on the basis of transaction categories.
You can define user-specific transaction types for the money market, foreign exchange, and derivatives
areas. The transaction types for securities, such as security purchases and sales, are already represented
internally in the system.

&XVWRPL]LQJ)LQDQFLDO7UDQVDFWLRQ7\SHV
$
3URGXFWW\SH)RUH[(;7(51$/

7UDQVW\SH6SRWWUDQVDFWLRQ
7UDQVFDW
1XPEHUUDQJHV

7UDQVDFWLRQV8QGHUO\LQJV
2IIHUV6LPXODWLRQV

%DFNRIILFH
3URFHVVLQJFDWHJRU\
$XWRPDWLFSRVWLQJUHOHDVH

/LPLWPDQDJHPHQW
/LPLWJURXS
 SAP AG 2001

You can uniquely classify a financial transaction by combining a product type with a financial
transaction type, such as product type "Foreign exchange" with transaction type "Spot transaction".
This transaction passes through a series of processing stages, which are referred to as "activities". When
you define the transaction type, you specify a processing category. This determines how the transaction
is processed (in other words, the sequence of the activities).
Example: You want spot transactions with product type 60A to involve the following activities: Order -
Contract - Settlement.

1XPEHU5DQJHVIRU7UDQVDFWLRQV
dkh[lnm g,gJ i}Tme lamqsfT iqxtsPgain}qsP ei

re;h[n it }e m |z}z~z u :*
,Tiqmn
d&e f;gJehjikTh:lnmTg oe[iTkThplqmg r*k gNgm itsiTkThplqmTgvuqwqs?x
y{z | z}znz}z~z}z~z}znz}z~z}zT| z}z~z}znz}z~z}z~}n}n |
y{z} z}znz}z~z}z~z |z}z~z}znz z}z~z}znz}z~z |}n}n |z~z}z~z}z
y{z} z}znz}z~z}z~z}nz}z~z}znz z}z~z}znz}z~z}~}n}n }z~z}z~z |
y{zn z}znz}z~z}z~z}nz}z~z}znz z}z~z}znz}z~z}~}n}n }z~z}z~}
y{zq z}znz}z~z}z~zn}z}z~z}znz z}z~z}znz}z~znn}n}n qz~z}z|
 SAP AG 2001

The transactions entered in the application are assigned a transaction number in the system. When you
define transaction types in Customizing, you enter a number range interval that corresponds to the
number assignment in the application. You have to define this range beforehand and specify whether the
numbers are to be assigned internally (by the system) or externally (by the user).

$FWLYLW\&DWHJRULHV
3URGXFWFDW 7UDQVDFWLRQFDW $FWLYLW\FDW

W T 2- 3, K 'L "
b;+'PB
' H " "
,&+- ' Y A "E" ,R/-J
,G Y 7=
' " , '
1 2, " 3 U _ ;'P'0F ,B
'
1 T I 2F " U
1Y Z R[
U
6<67(0/(9(/
3URGXFWW\SH 7UDQVDFWLRQW\SH
K 2 - 3,, & +K -'L' " K ]A
b,"<;" +,'LR/B-J
,
G '
K ,&'
K 2,2, "" 3B ;3 '? "
F K 2, " RS "
K I 3 -J
;'P "
F K ! $ " &@ ;+
K
'P " +' " " 'PQ+;RS

2 F K F
K p$ "<"
,T/+;RS K R[
K K
U U
86(5/(9(/
 SAP AG 2001

In the money market, foreign exchange, and derivatives areas, activity categories control the activities
that are possible for a particular transaction category.
Example:
3URGXFWFDWHJRU\ 7UDQVDFWLRQFDWHJRU\ $FWLYLW\FDWHJRU\
510 Fixed-term deposit 100 Investment 10 Contract

11 Rollover
20 Contract settlement
21 Rollover settlement
600 Foreign exchange 101 Forex spot transaction 10 Order

15 Order expiration
20 Contract
30 Settlement
The activity categories are displayed for reference in the transaction. They form the basis for the history
and for managing correspondence.

7UDQVDFWLRQ7\SHV$FWLYLW\&DWHJRULHV+LVWRU\
&RPSDQ\FRGH ,'(6$*
7UDQVDFWLRQ
3URGXFWW\SH D)RUH[(;7(51$/
7UDQVDFWLRQW\SH 6SRWWUDQVDFWLRQ
$FWLYHVWDWXV $FWLYH
$FW\ $FWLYLW\FDWHJRU\ 6WDWXV 7UDQVLWLRQIXQFWLRQ

&RQWUDFW 5HSODFHG 1HZHQWU\
6HWWOHPHQW $FWLYH $FWLYLW\WUDQVLWLRQ

 SAP AG 2002

When you process a financial transaction, it passes through several stages, which are indicated by
activity information.
Example:
The activity "contract" indicates that a transaction is legally binding.
The activity "settlement" indicates that the transaction data entered has been checked.

3URFHVVLQJ&DWHJRULHV
3URGXFWFDW 7UDQVDFWLRQFDW $FWLYLW\FDW 3URFHVVLQJFDW

W T 2- 3, K 'L " c
;b&;+'LB
' %
' " ' H " " K 7=
' " '
&+- ' Y A] "<" ,R/-J
,G _5 %FJF ,b, "
1 2, " ;3 U U K ;'P'<F ,B
'
1 T 7 I 2F " Y H " " K 7=
' " '
1Y Z R[
U
6<67(0/(9(/
3URGXFWW\SH 7UDQVDFWW\SH
K 2 - 3, & +K -'L' " K ]A
; b,"E" + 'PR_B-a

G '
K &'
K 72, " I 3 2F " K 2 " RS "
K
'N " +' " 'PQ+;RS K ! $ " &@ +
K $ "E"
T/+;RQ K F
K K R:
U K
U
86(5/(9(/
 SAP AG 2001

In the money market, foreign exchange and derivatives areas, the processing sequence of a financial
transaction is determined by processing categories.
Processing categories determine the sequence of the individual activities within a financial transaction.
They define the processing steps involved at the various stages - from entering a transaction in the
trading area, through to back office processing and the data transfer to Financial Accounting.
In this way you can define a chain of activities a particular transaction has to pass through in your
company.

&XVWRPL]LQJ7UDQVDFWLRQ7\SHV3URFHVVLQJ
&DWHJRULHV
3URGXFWW\SH)RUH[(;7(51$/
$
7UDQVW\SH6SRWWUDQVDFWLRQ

7UDQVFDW
1XPEHUUDQJHV
7UDQVDFWLRQV8QGHUO\LQJV

2IIHUV6LPXODWLRQV

%DFNRIILFH
3URFHVVLQJFDW 3URFHVVLQJFDWHJRU\
$XWRPDWLFSRVWLQJUHOHDVH 00101 = Order - contract - settlement
00102 = Order - contract
/LPLWPDQDJHPHQW
/LPLWJURXS
 SAP AG 2001

Processing categories are predefined in the system and depend on the product category and the
transaction category. You select one processing category for the individual transaction types from a
series of alternatives proposed by the system.
Example:
Product category Processing category
Fixed-term deposit 510 00001 Without settlement activities
510 00002 With settlement activities
Foreign exchange 600 00101 Order - contract - settlement
600 00102 Order - contract

)ORZ7\SHV
3URGXFW &RQGLWLRQFDW )ORZFDWHJRU\ &DOFXODWLRQFDW

FDWHJRU\ 6 -
F-
'N " ;+ ' T K #! " -
,&- F-J
, " ;+ K
DEF R
7UDQVDFWLRQ ) K - b- &
,
FDWHJRU\ 2$FJF " ;B
' K
D.F R
$,*
B;'.$ " - '? ) K - b- &
,
U
6<67(0/(9(/
3URGXFWW\SH &RQGLWLRQW\SH )ORZW\SH

K A =- b%
- $+
, K A$;/DL " - G=
7UDQVDFWW\SH K " - >F B-J

'N " ;+' 3&&@
,G
Kq 5 M
' Y K FaFqDN " - G=
K
'0V " ;'P_ .$+'LM
' 3&&@
,G
K 5 M
' " ;'P VJVJVJV
K
U
86(5/(9(/
 SAP AG 2001

Flow types describe various changes in cash flows. Flows are the basis for generating the cash flow as
well as for further processing, such as posting. The cash flow contains all the flow records in
chronological order and is used as a basis for updating transaction data to Financial Accounting, Cash
Management, and the Market Risk Analyzer.
Examples of typical flow types are fixed or variable interest, increases in the nominal transaction
amount, or commission.
You assign each flow type to just one flow category. However, several flow types can refer to the same
flow category. For example, you can assign both variable and fixed interest to the flow category
"Interest".
Payment flows for the cash flow and for posting are controlled by two indicators, which you have to
assign to each flow type. The calculation category controls how the flow is processed by the financial
mathematical modules that generate the cash flow. The flow category controls the way the flow is
processed for accounting purposes.
Flows can result from conditions (such as interest flows), manual entries (such as charges),
accrual/deferral runs (such as interest accruals/deferrals), or valuation runs (such as write-ups/write-
downs).
Examples of flow categories are accounting flows such as inflows (such as a security purchase),
outflows (for example, repayment), expenses or revenues. Examples of cash flows are security
purchases/sales, interest payments, repayments, or charges.

&XVWRPL]LQJ)ORZ7\SHV
)ORZW\SH
1DPH %X\IRUHLJQH[FKDQJH
&RQWURO
&ODVVLILFDWLRQ 6WUXFWXUHFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
)ORZFDWHJRU\3ULQFLSDOLQFUHDVH

&DOFXODWLRQFDW,QIORZJHQHULF
$$
5HOHYDQWWR&0
5HOHYDQWWRSRVLWLRQ 5HOHYDQWWRYDOXDWLRQ
5HOHYDQWWRSRVWLQJ5HOHYDQWWR3/5HOIRUDFFUXDOGHIHUUDO

3D\PHQWUHTXHVW
,QGLYLGXDOSD\PHQW
 SAP AG 2001

You define flow types in Customizing:

y Classifications are predefined in the system and group the flow types according to different business
criteria (structure characteristic, accrual/deferral, valuation ...).
y The 5HOHYDQWWR&0indicator tells you whether the flow is updated in Cash Management.
y The 5HOHYDQWWRSRVWLQJindicator tells you whether the flow is transferred to Financial Accounting.
y You select the 5HOHYDQWWRSRVLWLRQ5HOHYDQWWR3/indicators to display the flows in drilldown
reporting.
y The 5HOHYDQWWRYDOXDWLRQ5HOHYDQWIRUDFFUXDOGHIHUUDOindicators tell you whether the flow is
included in a valuation run or an accrual/deferral run.
y The (IIHFWLYHLQWHUHVWUDWHFDOFXODWLRQ indicator tells you whether this flow is included in the effective
interest calculation.
y The 3D\PHQWUHTXHVWindicator tells you whether a payment request may be generated for this flow.
y The ,QGLYLGXDOSD\PHQWindicator tells you whether amounts with this flow type must be paid
individually in a payment request.

$VVLJQ)ORZ7\SHVWR7UDQVDFWLRQ7\SHV
3URGXFWW\SH
$ )RUH[(;7(51$/
7UDQVDFWLRQW\SH6SRWWUDQVDFWLRQ

)ORZW\SH %X\IRUHLJQH[FKDQJH
'LUHFWLRQ ,QFRPLQJ
 SAP AG 2001


&RQGLWLRQ7\SHV
3URGXFW &RQGLWLRQFDW
FDWHJRU\ 6 -
F-
'P " ;+ '
7UDQVDFWLRQ
FDWHJRU\ 2$FJF " B
;'
$,=
B '0$ " - '?
U
6<67(0/(9(/
3URGXFWW\SH &RQGLWLRQW\SH
K ]A 3=
$ +'P %- b-
,
7UDQVDFWLRQ K " - >F B-J
; 'P " +'

-
W\SH
Kq 5 B
;'
K
'P " +' " 'P_ .V
K 5 B
;' " ;'N
K
QJH
U
H [FKD
HLJQ
W IRUIRU
1R
86(5/(9(/
 SAP AG 2001

Within SAP CFM, financial transactions are represented on the basis of flow and condition concepts.
Conditions are elements of a financial transaction that are defined in a contract. You can define different
forms of interest, dividend, or repayment methods as condition types. By assigning condition types to
product types/transaction types, you can ensure that the appropriate structure characteristics are assigned
to each product type. Condition types therefore control which structure characteristics are displayed
when you create a transaction (for a particular product type).
Condition categories are the basis for processing condition types, and they structure the classification of
flows and conditions. Examples of condition categories are principal increases, full repayment upon
maturity, or nominal interest.
You define condition types on the basis of condition categories, and assign them to the related
product/transaction type.

&XVWRPL]LQJ&RQGLWLRQ7\SHV
&RQGLWLRQW\SH
1DPHVKRUW 1RPLQWHUHVW
&RQGLWLRQW\SHWH[W 1RPLQDOLQWHUHVW
1DPHORQJ 1RPLQDOLQWHUHVW
&RQWURO
&ODVVLILFDWLRQ 6WUXFWXUHFKDUDFWHULVWLFV

&RQGLWLRQFDWHJRU\1RPLQDOLQWHUHVW
&DOFXODWLRQFDWHJRU\1RPLQDOLQWHUHVW
7=
*HQHUDWHGIORZW\SH1RPLQDOLQWHUHVW

H
DQJ
Q H [FK
HLJ
W IRUIRU
1R
 SAP AG 2001

Conditions are primarily used to generate flows automatically. You therefore have to assign the flow
types, which are elements of the cash flow, to condition types.
As you do this, remember that some condition types do not generate any flows (for example, interest rate
adjustment, repayment settlement).

$VVLJQ&RQGLWLRQ7\SHVWR7UDQVDFWLRQ7\SHV
3URGXFWW\SH $)L[HGWHUPGHS(;7(51$/
7UDQVDFWLRQW\SH ,QYHVWPHQW
&RQGLWLRQW\SH 1RPLQDOLQWHUHVW
'LUHFWLRQ ,QFRPLQJDQGRXWJRLQJ
JH
[F KDQ
H
LJQ
IRU IRUH

1RW
 SAP AG 2001

Assigning condition and flow types to the product and transaction types gives you considerable
flexibility in setting up the structure of your transactions.

8SGDWH7\SHV7HUPLQRORJ\
z An update type describes and classifies a flow in a similar way to a flow

type.
z Update types are used in all the parallel valuation areas.
z The new term "update type" was introduced because the existing term
"flow type" was not used and interpreted in a uniform manner.
➪ Objective: Uniform view of all flows
z The update type no longer depends on the module.
z The update type has an implicit direction. This means, for example, that
you need two different update types to represent incoming and outgoing
payments.
z The new update type only consists of the definition itself and a language-
dependent text. No other indicators are defined directly with the update
type.
 SAP AG 2002

A new, uniform update type has been defined for the new position management functions available for
CFM. This update type is no longer dependent on the module, in other words, all the update types for the
money market, forex, derivatives and securities modules are held in a single table.
In SAP CFM, a flow is the unit used to represent flow data that is relevant in the short-term and subject
to change. Usually, a flow is part of a business transaction.
Flows that are passed on to the distributor must carry an XSGDWHW\SH. An update type describes and
classifies a flow in a similar way to a flow type. Since the existing flow type is not always used and
interpreted in the same way, the new "update type" has been introduced to give all the distributor
recipients a uniform view of the flows.
The new update type can only be used to depict one direction (inflow or outflow). For example, you
need two update types to represent incoming and outgoing charges. This makes it easier for the
subsequent functions to interpret the update types.

8SGDWH7\SHV&XVWRPL]LQJ,'HILQLWLRQ
z The IDs for the new update types have been compiled on the basis
of the old flow types:
¬ ([DPSOH8SGDWHW\SH);
FX = Forex
1000 = Flow type for forex purchase
+ = + sign
d&}h[ iq ne,i~mqi}sP e i~7 (e,g k qnsam7s ;}m~ i]sP¡}m7r8k~}s(e;h: ¢} i} qmssL iqq£m ¤ qm gJmq
¥ sL¡7sN¡qm]~qnsmh[¦
%u = Derivatives
fny = Forex
§¨ Update types are " ,++
©©
= Loans
K
= Money market =$F in a
managed
%u table.
= Securities: Transaction management
8© = Securities: Position management
ª = Valuation
ª* = Valuation reset
%« o = Derived Business Transactions - (price/rate gains and
losses, translation and reconciliation flows, valuation, ...)
 SAP AG 2001

You create the update types in the IMG activity 'HILQH8SGDWH7\SHVspecifying a short and long name
for each one.
The Customizing settings delivered with the system include update types, assignment of update types to
usages, and specifications for the various usages. SAP recommends that you use the Customizing
settings delivered with the system as the basis for making your own settings.

8SGDWH7\SHV&XVWRPL]LQJ,,
'HILQHXSGDWHW\SHV(see terminology)
$VVLJQXSGDWHW\SHVWRXVDJHV
H b, " b- Rc&D*$+, G;+ U
0001 Transaction management
0002 Securities account management
0003 Securities account transfer
0004 Corporate action
0005 Exercising rights
0006 Accrual/deferral
0007 Other flows (exercising rights)
1000 Operative loans management
2001 Margin management for listed options and futures
9000 Position initialization
9001 Derived business transactions
9002 Key date valuation
9004 Local currency reconciliation
9005 FAS133 distribution
9006 Valuation class transfer
9007 Account assignment reference transfer
 SAP AG 2001

An update type can be assigned to several XVDJHV You need to assign an update type to a usage when
this function (usage) generates or processes the update type.
The Customizing settings delivered with the system include update types, assignment of update types to
usages, and specifications for the various usages. SAP recommends that you use the Customizing
settings delivered with the system as the basis for making your own settings.

8SGDWH7\SHV&XVWRPL]LQJ,,,
)RUVRPHXVDJHV\RXPXVWHQWHUVSHFLILFLQIRUPDWLRQIRUWKH
XSGDWHW\SHV
2SHUDWLYHYDOXDWLRQDUHD
® $VVLJQIORZW\SHVWRXSGDWHW\SHV
® 6SHFLILFFRQWUROVHWWLQJVDVUHTXLUHG
 SAP AG 2001

For some usages you need to enter specific information for the update types in various IMG activities.
These details are required by the function (usage) in order to be able to process the update type. You can
also define and assign additional update types (with different account assignment reference settings, for
example).
In the IMG activity $VVLJQ7UDQVDFWLRQ)ORZ7\SHVWR8SGDWH7\SHV you assign the flow types for the
money market, forex, derivatives and securities areas to the corresponding update types for updating the
transaction data in the parallel valuation areas.

)LQDQFLDO3URGXFW)L[HG7HUP'HSRVLW([DPSOH
'HILQHSURGXFWW\SH PXX
'HILQHWUDQVDFWLRQW\SH TXX = Investment

TZZ = Borrowing
ZLWKSURFHVVLQJFDWHJRU\
'HILQHIORZW\SHV FXX1 = Principal increase

FXX2 = Principal decrease
FXX3 = Full repaym. on maturity
FXX5 = Interest
'HILQHFRQGLWLRQW\SHV 2xx1 = Full repaym. on maturity

2xx2 = Interest
'HILQHXSGDWHW\SHV
"Assign"
 SAP AG 2001

This slide summarizes all the parameters that have to be assigned and defined to set up the financial
transaction structure in CFM.
Assigning condition and flow types to the product and transaction types gives you considerable
flexibility in setting up the structure of your transactions.

)LQDQFLDO7UDQVDFWLRQ$UFKLWHFWXUH
7UDQVIHUIORZ
3D\PHQW
LQIRUPDWLRQ
3URGXFWW\SH 9DOXDWLRQIORZ
3RVWLQJ
7UDQVDFWLRQW\SH
LQIRUPDWLRQ
%XVLQHVVSDUWQHU $FFUXDOGHIHUUDOIORZ
&DOFXODWLRQ
EDVHV
*HQHUDOLQIR +LVWRU\ )ORZVGHVFULELQJ
VWUXFWXUH
FKDUDFWHULVWLFV
FW
LHV
DF
&RQGLWLRQV
HU
&RQGLWLRQV
UP
&RQGLWLRQV
&RQGLWLRQV
DG
QF
&RQGLWLRQV
HW
&RQGLWLRQV
7H
7U
KH
UUH
OV
&X
%D
W
HQ
\P
VW
H
SD
HU

UH
,QW
 SAP AG 2001
When you create a financial transaction, its structure characteristics are used to determine the cash flow
via the condition and flow types. This cash flow contains all the information that is relevant to a
financial transaction in the form of flow records. For instance, the amount invested, the interest
payments, and the repayments are concentrated in one or more flow records. The cash flow of a
transaction is made up of flow records that can be generated in various ways:
y Flows entered manually, such as charges
y Automatically generated flow record. These may be generated from conditions (via the flow types
assigned to the condition type) or on the basis of accrual/deferral or valuation runs, for example.

)LQDQFLDO7UDQVDFWLRQV&DVK)ORZ
%DVLVIRU
$PRXQW
7UDQVDFWLRQ LQYHVWHG z 8SGDWLQJ&DVK0DQDJHPHQW
$&78$/
ERUURZHG z 8SGDWLQJ)LQDQFLDO$FFRXQWLQJ
XVLQJIOH[LEOHDFFRXQW
GHWHUPLQDWLRQ
&RQGLWLRQ z 7ULJJHULQJSD\PHQWV
3/$11(' z 8SGDWLQJLWHPV
z $FFUXHGGHIHUUHGLQWHUHVW
z )RUHLJQFXUUHQF\YDOXDWLRQ
&DVKIORZH[DPSOH
z <LHOGFDOFXODWLRQ
,QYHVWPHQW <<P 81, PDGH
,QWHUHVW << 81, DQWLFLSDWHG
5HSD\PHQW <<P 81, DQWLFLSDWHG
 SAP AG 2001

The cash flow of financial transactions forms the basis for all trading, transaction management, and
position management processes. It is also used for CFM evaluations.
The cash flows in CFM are determined by the function s for financial mathematics.
You can display a basic cash flow view, or include posting or payment information. From the display,
you can call up details of how the amounts were calculated.
The system provides a set of formulas that can be applied on a modular basis, depending on how you
configure the CFM application.
In CFM, application-specific control programs call up central financial mathematical function modules,
such as modules for calculating interest and repayment schedules.
These FiMa function modules calculate a series of flows known as a cash flow (payment flow) for a
financial transaction in the application (such as a stock purchase or swap). The flows are generated for a
specified calculation period on the basis of the conditions assigned to the financial transaction.

6$3)LQDQFLDO0DWKHPDWLFVLQWKH7UDQVDFWLRQ
0DQDJHU3URFHVV)ORZ
,1387 ,1387 287387

)/2:5(&25'6 &21',7,216 )/2:5(&25'6
µÊ Ë=ÊÌ#³<»Jº,¶&» Á ¿° µÊ Ë=ÊÍ º;¼Lµ³Lµ;¸¼ µÊ Ë=Ê Ì*³.»Jº,¶» Á ¿°»º,¶&³Lµ¿;¸ µ
»Jº,¶³Nµ¿;¸&µ Î#±Â»º ¿°» º¼Lµ³Pµ;¸¼
½Ä°J°³Pµ Á ÊT±=ºBÂM¿¼0Ä³E» ¼?Ï
86(5/(9(/
6<67(0/(9(/
6$3)L0D
¯.° ± ²´³Nµ ¶,±%³L·&¸ 6$3)L0D
¹7±=º,·%» ¼0» ±=º¸ 6$3)L0D
½° ±,²³Pµ ¶ ±=³P·&¸
¾:µº µ³N¿;¼E» ±=º/±,¯¿

¹±=º¼E³P±=° ¶;¿;¸À/¯<° ±,²
Á ¿³P¿,ÂBµ;¼Lµ³N¸ »º_¼EÀ µQ¯0±%³0ÂX±&¯
½»JÃ:¿¯.° ±,²´³Nµ,¶±=³L·&¸
)XQFWLRQV
¹7¿° ¶&Ä° ¿;¼Nµ/µ;¯N¯Pµ,¶ ¼<» Å,µ Æ[° ¼Lµ³.º ¿;¼0» Å,µ_µ;¯N¯Pµ ¶ ¼.» Å,µ ÇÈ,µ ¶&Ä¼Nµ
»º¼?µ³Lµ;¸¼8³L¿;¼Lµ ¶;¿° ¶&Ä° ¿;¼.» ±*º¸ ¿ ¶¶&³.Ä ¿° É(·&µ;¯Lµ³E³L¿°
 SAP AG 2001

Flow records are either entered manually or generated from the condition items in the transactions or by
other functions, such as discount calculations or accrual/deferral runs. The system first generates planned
records, which are transformed into actual records when the flows are posted.
Characteristics of a flow record:
y Flow type (such as interest or repayment)
y Calendar data (calculation date, due date, planning date, calculation period)
y An amount in local currency (and foreign currency)
Application flow records also contain posting information.
In addition to the flow type and flow category, which reflect how the flow is used, each flow category
also carries a calculation category. The calculation category controls how the flow is processed by SAP’s
financial mathematics modules.
The flow records can be seen as "skeleton" flows for a specific date. When they are generated, these
"skeleton" flows are assigned all the relevant data needed to calculate the currency amounts (such as the
calculation period, period, or interest calculation method).

6WUXFWXUH8QLW6XPPDU\
z %\FRQILJXULQJWKHWUDQVDFWLRQPDVWHUGDWD
\RXKDYHIXOILOOHGDGGLWLRQDOSUHUHTXLVLWHVIRU
FUHDWLQJILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQVLQWKH&)0
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHU
 SAP AG 2001


([HUFLVHV
8QLW7UDQVDFWLRQDQG3RVLWLRQ0DQDJHPHQW6WUXFWXUH
7RSLF&UHDWLQJD1HZ3URGXFW)L[HG7HUP'HSRVLW

• Creating the master data to configure new product types
You want to configure your own financial instruments in Customizing.
1-1 Set up your own fixed-term deposit product. Assign the SURGXFWW\SH the following ID:
PXX (XX = your group number); with product category 510.
1-2 Define your own transaction types:
− Check beforehand whether QXPEHUUDQJHVfor transaction types have been defined

for your company code.
− Create a WUDQVDFWLRQW\SHfor a fixed-term deposit using TXX (XX = your group
name) as the transaction type ID.
− Do not settle the fixed-term deposit.
− Use the number range ’01’ for the transactions. You do not want users to be able to
make offers or perform simulations.
− You want the posting to be released automatically, and not by a second user. Set
the indicator accordingly.

1-3 Define the following IORZW\SHV for your own fixed-term deposit product:
ID
− Principal increase FXX1 (XX = your group ID)
− Principal decrease FXX2
− Final repayment FXX3
− Interest capitalization FXX4
− Nominal interest FXX5
− Charges FXX6
− Commission FXX7
'HILQLQJIORZW\SHVXVLQJWKHFRS\IXQFWLRQ:
You can copy the entries for the following flow types to your new flow types:
Flow type
− Principal increase 1100
− Principal decrease 1110
− Final repayment 1120
− Interest capitalization 1150
− Nominal interest 1200
− Charges 1901
− Commission 1902
1-4 Assign all the new flow types FXX ... H[FHSWIRULQWHUHVWDQGUHSD\PHQWto your
new transaction type TXX (together with your new product type PXX).
1-5 Set up the following FRQGLWLRQW\SHV:
Final repayment Nominal interest

,';; ,';;
- Structure characteristics - Structure characteristics
- Flow category: - Flow category:
Final repayment Nominal interest
- Flow type generated: - Flow type generated:
FXX3 Final repayment FXX5 Nominal interest
You can use the following condition types to copy the data for your condition types:
)LQDOUHSD\PHQW
1RPLQDOLQWHUHVW

1-6 Assign the condition types

)LQDOUHSD\PHQW
(2XX1) and

1RPLQDOLQWHUHVW
(2XX2)
to your transaction type fixed-term deposit TXX (in combination with your product
type PXX).
Both condition types apply for the incoming and the outgoing sides of the transaction.
1-7 Assign corresponding update types to the flow types you have just created.
1-7-1 Define the following new XSGDWHtypes:

− Principal increase 8XX1 - (XX = your group ID)
− Principal decrease 8XX2 +
− Final repayment 8XX3 +
− Interest capitalization 8XX4 -
− Nominal interest 8XX5 +
− Charges 8XX6 -
− Commission 8XX7 -
1-7-2 Assign the update types to the usage ’0001 Transaction management’.
1-7-3 Assign the update types to the transaction flow types:
Contract Flow Direction Update

type type type
Principal increase: MM FXX1 Outflow UXX1 -

Principal decrease: MM FXX2 Inflow UXX2 +
Final repayment: MM FXX3 Inflow UXX3 +
Interest capitalizat.: MM FXX4 Outflow UXX4 -
Nominal interest: MM FXX5 Inflow UXX5 +
Charges: MM FXX6 Outflow UXX6 -
Commission: MM FXX7 Outflow UXX7 -
1-8 Create a IL[HGWHUPGHSRVLW with your house bank using your QHZSURGXFWW\SH
On the $GPLQLVWUDWLRQ tab, enter "short-term investments" as the general valuation
class.
Check the cash flow and add other flows (such as charges). Does the transaction need
to be settled?

2SWLRQDO([HUFLVHV
7RSLF&UHDWLQJD1HZ3URGXFW&XUUHQF\2SWLRQ
• Creating the master data to configure a different product type
Your Treasury department wants to purchase a currency option (OTC) to

hedge against the falling US dollar. Your company has not used currency
options before. Make the necessary settings in the system to allow your
traders to use this product.
2-1 Create the product type for the FXUUHQF\RSWLRQ Assign the following ID to the product
type: OXX (XX = your group number).
− Assign the product type to the number range ’01’.

− You want the currency option to be exercised physically (no cash settlement).
− The option is price-quoted and will be settled once (normal style).
− It is a standard option that can be exercised on any bank working day.
− Use the product type 60A (external forex transaction) and transaction type 101
(spot transaction) as the XQGHUO\LQJ
2-2 Define your own WUDQVDFWLRQW\SH:
For your product type currency option OXX (XX = your group name), define the
WUDQVDFWLRQW\SH’Purchase’ OXX (XX = your group name).
− Assign the processing category 00101 to your transaction type:2UGHUFRQWVHWWO

H[HUFLVH([SLUVHWWOWHUPWHUPVHWWO
− Assign the transaction type to number range ’03’. The number range for the
underlying corresponds to the second number range for the forex spot transaction
(number range 19). You do not want currency options to be released for posting
automatically.

2-3 Assign the following IORZW\SHV to your transaction type:
− 1301 Option premium (OTC) forex

− 1310 Cash settlement
− 1320 Premium transfer on expiration
− 1321 Premium transfer on exercise
− 1900 Charges
2-4 Assign the flow types to update types.
2-5 Create a transaction in the application using your new product type for currency
options.
Bear in mind that your business partner will need to be authorized for OTC options.

6ROXWLRQV
7RSLF&UHDWLQJD1HZ3URGXFW)L[HG7HUP'HSRVLW
1-1 Create fixed-term deposit product:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
Ö&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQWÖ7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHUÖ0RQH\0DUNHWÖ
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ3URGXFW7\SHVÖ'HILQH3URGXFW7\SHV

%XWWRQ1HZHQWULHV
1-2 Define transaction types:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ7UDQVDFWLRQ7\SHVÖ'HILQH1XPEHU5DQJHV

<RXGRQRWQHHGWRHQWHUDQ\QHZGDWDKHUHMXVWFKHFNWKHH[LVWLQJHQWULHV
&XVWRPL]LQJ
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ7UDQVDFWLRQ7\SHVÖ'HILQH7UDQVDFWLRQ7\SHV

%XWWRQ1HZHQWULHV
1-3 Define flow types:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ)ORZ7\SHVÖ'HILQH)ORZ7\SHV

%XWWRQ1HZHQWULHV

1-4 Assign flow types:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ)ORZ7\SHVÖ$VVLJQ)ORZ7\SHVWR7UDQVDFWLRQ
7\SH

%XWWRQ1HZHQWULHV
1-5 Define condition types:

&XVWRPL]LQJ
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ&RQGLWLRQ7\SHVÖ'HILQH&RQGLWLRQ7\SHV

%XWWRQ1HZHQWULHV
1-6 Assign condition types
&XVWRPL]LQJ
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ&RQGLWLRQ7\SHVÖ$VVLJQ&RQGLWLRQ7\SHVWR
7UDQVDFWLRQ7\SH

%XWWRQ1HZHQWULHV
1-7 Define update types
1-7-1 Define update types:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ8SGDWH7\SHVÖ'HILQH8SGDWH7\SHV

%XWWRQ1HZHQWULHV
1-7-2 Assign update types to usages:
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ8SGDWH7\SHVÖ$VVLJQ8SGDWH7\SHVWR8VDJHV

1-7-3 Assign update types to flow types:
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ8SGDWH7\SHVÖ$VVLJQ7UDQVDFWLRQ)ORZ7\SHVWR
8SGDWH7\SHV

1-8 Create fixed-term deposit:
$SSOLFDWLRQ

6ROXWLRQV
7RSLF&UHDWLQJD1HZ3URGXFW&XUUHQF\2SWLRQ
2-1 Create product type for currency options:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
Ö&RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQWÖ7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHUÖ27&'HULYDWLYHV
Ö7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ3URGXFW7\SHVÖ'HILQH3URGXFW7\SHV

%XWWRQ1HZHQWULHV
2-2 Define transaction type:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
Ö7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ7UDQVDFWLRQ7\SHVÖ'HILQH7UDQVDFWLRQ7\SHV

%XWWRQ1HZHQWULHV
2-3 Assign flow types:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
Ö7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ)ORZ7\SHVÖ$VVLJQ)ORZ7\SHVWR7UDQVDFWLRQ
7\SHV

%XWWRQ1HZHQWULHV
2-4 Create currency option:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
'HULYDWLYHVÖ7UDGLQJÖ27&2SWLRQÖ&UHDWH

&RQWHQWV
z Trading
z Back office
z Accounting
 SAP AG 2001


8QLW2EMHFWLYHV
WR
z Enter financial transactions in the CFM Transaction
Manager from start to finish - from the trading stage
through to the back office and financial accounting.
 SAP AG 2001


2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
%DQNV
,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


%XVLQHVV6FHQDULR
z $IWHUOHDUQLQJDERXWWKHEDVLFVHWWLQJVIRUPDSSLQJ
ILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQVLQWKH&)07UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHU
\RXZLOOQRZOHDUQDERXWWKHHQWLUHWUDQVDFWLRQSURFHVV
DQGKRZWKLVSURFHVVLVUHSUHVHQWHGLQWKHV\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


)LQDQFLDO7UDQVDFWLRQ2YHUYLHZ
(YDOXDWLRQUHSRUWVLQWKH,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
)RUH[$GPLQLVWUDWLRQ
FRQILJXUHGLQWKHV\VWHP ([HFXWH
0DVWHUGDWD ILQDQFLDO
%XVLQHVVSDUWQHUV
WUDQVDFWLRQV
7UDQVDFWLRQDXWKRUL]DWLRQV
3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
&RUUHVSRQGHQFH
&XUUHQFLHV )LQDQFLDO$FFRXQWLQJ
7UDQVDFWLRQPDQDJHPHQW
&XVWRPL]LQJ
 SAP AG 2001

Before you can actually enter transactions, such as forex deals, you have to maintain master data. This
includes creating business partners and setting up product types and transaction types.
You can then enter all the data relating to a forex transaction.
The functions for managing transactions and positions also include reporting functions.
Flows relevant for posting are transferred to Financial Accounting.

7UDGLQJ)XQFWLRQV
5HOHDVH
&UHDWHQHZRIIHU 6HWWOHPHQWFRQWURO
3RVWLQJV
RUGHUFRQWUDFW ,QWHUHVWUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
3D\PHQW
([HUFLVHH[SLUDWLRQ 1HWWLQJ WUDQVDFWLRQV
1RWLFH 5HIHUHQFHV 5HYHUVDOV
5ROORYHUV &RQILUPDWLRQOHWWHUV $FFUXDOVGHIHUUDOV
([HUFLVHULJKWV 6HFDFFRXQWWUDQVIHUV
9DOXDWLRQ
&RUSRUDWHDFWLRQV
8VHUDXWKRUL]DWLRQ
/LPLWPDQDJHPHQW
 SAP AG 2001

Within the transaction and position management process, a distinction is made between the following
areas:
y In the trading area you HQWHURIIHUVDQGWUDQVDFWLRQV and exercise rights.
y In theback office you check (settle) existing transactions and carry out position management
activities, such as securities account transfers.
y In the accounting area you process the relevant account-based activities in the subledger and transfer
posting information to the general ledger in Financial Accounting.
You can set up your system in such a way that a transaction must be released by one/several (other)
employees before it can be posted.

7UDGLQJ
)LQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQV
z $UHDVVLJQHGWRWKHLURUJDQL]DWLRQDOHQWLW\FRPSDQ\FRGH
LQWKHHQWHUSULVH
:LGHUDQJHRIGLIIHUHQWRSWLRQVWRUHIOHFWWKHRUJDQL]DWLRQDO
VWUXFWXUHVRIJURXSFRPSDQLHV
z $UHFRQFOXGHGIRUDVSHFLILFSURGXFWW\SHWUDQVDFWLRQW\SH
<RXDUHIUHHWRGHILQHSURGXFWW\SHVDQGWUDQVDFWLRQW\SHV
WKDWVXLW\RXUUHTXLUHPHQWV
z $UHFRQFOXGHGZLWKDEXVLQHVVSDUWQHU
,QWHUQDODQGH[WHUQDOEDQNVEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUV
z &DQEHFUHDWHGZLWKGLIIHUHQWSURFHVVLQJFDWHJRULHV
 SAP AG 2001

The main functions for entering and changing financial transactions are grouped together in the trading
area. To map financial transactions in the system efficiently, you first have to make basic settings:
y :KLFKRUJDQL]DWLRQDOXQLWFRPSDQ\FRGH LVFRQFOXGLQJWKHILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQ"
This setting enables companies with complex organizational structures, such as those with central
treasury divisions, to differentiate between the various company areas.
y :KLFKILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQLVEHLQJFRQFOXGHG"
Here, you specify the product and transaction types along with the relevant processing rules.
y :LWKZKRPDUH\RXFRQFOXGLQJWKHILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQ"
Each financial transaction is linked to a business partner. By defining data for the business partner,
you can speed up data entry for your transactions. If, for example, you always use the same bank and
payment details with a business partner, they can be added automatically to the financial transaction.
You can also set up restrictions that allow only certain product types to be traded with a given
business partner.

7UDGLQJ&UHDWLQJ7UDQVDFWLRQV

!#"
$&% (')+**,( 5 6) % +7 8 - &9;:<>=
-.% /+*102*3
??** % /+*1@ (
$ % *4 % 'A '*B/)?C)ED< F
?@ G4@ *1@ ( /

$ % *BGJ(H @
D'/@ //N* % /)+*4@ (

K % ? %3L 6@ 7@M )I ( * % +*
7?*B % H ')
A % //@ I( ?E *
-.% /+*1@ (
 SAP AG 2001

You create transactions with a business partner in a particular company code. Each transaction has a
certain producttype and transaction type.
Using )LHOGVHOHFWLRQFRQWURO you can control a large number of the visible fields. This enables you to set
up the appearance of the display screens for the CFM Transaction Manager to suit the prevailing
business conditions.
You group the visible fields into field groups according to different business criteria. Each of the
available field groups can be assigned an attribute, which determines how the fields appear for the user.
A field group can be suppressed (hidden), set to display only, or contain required entries.

)LQDQFLDO7UDQVDFWLRQVLQ&DVK0DQDJHPHQW
$VVLJQSODQQLQJOHYHOV
O(
P"

6) % 7Q7*B % H
$
6) % 7RA) F2/
'%
S * % +* &DVK0DQDJHPHQW'LVSOD\/HYHOV

%DQNV
= /) % @ *1@ ( L L TUZ\ [^L ] [`VW
_ Z\ [^L ] [âV Z\ [\L ]M[hY g H b *Xc` de+% f
fe^k>l2cnmnoqp Z^g`[2r [h[`[ khksknr khk`k khksknr khksk kh^k knr khksk khsk knr khk`k
0)00 00i0 j
DB
000 ththt ththt ht tht ht tht
b ehcnfxXv mhw Z^g`[2r [h[`[ khk^knr khksk khksknr khk`k khk^knr khksk khk`knr khksk
0)00 000 u
B5
... ... ... ... ...
6 y cnm+o1qp ^Z g`[2r [h[`[ hk k^knr khksk hk ksknr khk`k hk k^knr khksk hk k`knr khksk
y cnb cmzê khksknr khk`k hk k^knr khksk hk ksknr khk`k hk k^knr khksk hk k`knr khksk
 SAP AG 2001

Each activity category (status) within a business transaction (order, contract, settlement, etc.) can be
displayed automatically in Cash Management and, if required, viewed at separate levels.
In this way, cash flows from CFM transactions that have not yet been posted, but whose value date is
known, can be used by the cash manager for forecasting and planning.
In Customizing you maintain the planning levels for G/L and/or subledger accounts for the relevant
product types and activity categories. This setting determines the various levels at which you can display
a contract.
Example:
Product type: 60A Forex
Activity category: 20 Contract
Level: DB Forex (bank known)

&DVK)ORZVLQ&DVK0DQDJHPHQW
7UDQVDFWLRQPDQDJHPHQW&DVKIORZ
-XQ )RUH[SXUFKDVH
-XQ )RUH[VDOH
%XVLQHVVSDUWQHU %XVLQHVVSDUWQHUWUDQVDFWLRQ
3ODQQLQJJURXSV 3D\PHQWGHWDLOVDQGKRXVHEDQNV
(GRPHVWLFFXVWRPHU 86' '% *,581

81, '% *,581
6XEOHGJHUDFFRXQWV -81 -81 %DQNDFFRXQWV

'3 )RUH[ '%)RUH[
( 'RPHVWLFFXVWRPHUV '%*,52
$OWHUQDWLYH $OWHUQDWLYH
3D\PHQWGHWDLOV 3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
XQNQRZQ NQRZQ
 SAP AG 2001

Alternative 1:
If no payment details have been entered in the transaction (= bank accounts are unknown), the cash flow
cannot be displayed for a bank (clearing) account. However, the amount does appear in the cash flow for
the relevant subledger accounts, which means it can still be seen in Cash Management. The system uses
the planning group entered in the master record of the business partner.
Alternative 2:
If payment details have been entered in the transaction (= bank accounts are known), the cash flow is
displayed in Cash Management at the level that is assigned to the corresponding bank (clearing) account.

&ROOHFWLYH3URFHVVLQJ0RQH\0DUNHW
z 2YHUYLHZRIPRQH\PDUNHWWUDQVDFWLRQVWKDWFRUUHVSRQGWRWKH
VHOHFWLRQFULWHULDHQWHUHG
z 3URFHVVWKHUHOHYDQWWUDQVDFWLRQV
&UHDWH
&KDQJH
'LVSOD\
5ROORYHU
*LYHQRWLFH
6HWWOH
5HYHUVH
+LVWRU\
z %UDQFKGLUHFWO\WRWKHLQGLYLGXDOWUDQVDFWLRQ
z &RQQHFWHGWRWKH6$3/LVW9LHZHU
 SAP AG 2001

The collective processing function helps you manage your transactions systematically by displaying a
list of all the transactions with common selection criteria. The list includes key information about each
transaction as well as a range of processing functions.
From this list, you can branch directly to the individual transactions.
The connection to the SAP List Viewer provides you with a whole range of display options. You can
structure your list by column or row, sort the list, and display totals.You can save these display variants
for later use.
When you have finished processing a transaction, the system sets a SURFHVVLQJLQGLFDWRU.

7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQW:RUNOLVWDQG&ROOHFWLYH
3URFHVVLQJ
z )LQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQVLQGLIIHUHQWSURGXFWFDWHJRULHVFDQ
EHSURFHVVHGWRJHWKHU
z <RXFDQPDNHXVHUVSHFLILFVHWWLQJVIRUPDQDJLQJ
ILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQV
z <RXFDQVHOHFWDQGGLVSOD\ILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQVLQ&)0
z <RXFDQEUDQFKWRWKHSURFHVVLQJVFUHHQVIRULQGLYLGXDO
WUDQVDFWLRQV
z 'DWDLVGLVSOD\HGXVLQJWKH6$3/LVW9LHZHU
 SAP AG 2001

You can process financial transactions in the following product categories together:
y Fixed-term deposits and deposits at notice
y Commercial Paper
y Cash flow transactions
y Forex spot and forward exchange transactions
y Interest rate derivatives
y OTC options
y Futures
y Securities
You can define sets of selection criteria as variants and manage the variants in a tree in collective
processing. The tree view can be user-specific, or apply for all users.
The display variant controls the layout of the list, and can contain the following information:
y Column layout
y Sort criteria
y Filter conditions

%DFN2IILFH)XQFWLRQV
5HOHDVH
3RVWLQJV
3D\PHQW
9DOXDWLRQ
&RUSRUDWHDFWLRQV
8VHUDXWKRUL]DWLRQ
/LPLWPDQDJHPHQW
 SAP AG 2001

In theback office you check (settle) existing transactions and carry out position management activities,
such as securities account transfers.

%DFN2IILFH
%DFNRIILFH $FFRXQWLQJ
&RUUHVSRQGHQFH 3RVLWLRQPDQDJHPHQW 6HWWOHPHQWRI

WUDQVDFWLRQV
{ &RQILUPDWLRQ { 6HWWOHPHQWFRQWURO
{ &ROOHFWLYHSURFHVVLQJ
PDQDJHPHQW { { 3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
1HWWLQJ |M} ~ J }
LQFRPLQJ { 5HIHUHQFHV
RXWJRLQJ { 4 X \B,
,QWHUHVWUDWHFKDQJHV
{ 6HFDFFRXQW X J
WUDQVIHUV
{ &DSLWDOVWUXFWXUH
FKDQJHV
h4 4 ` +`4 S s
 SAP AG 2001

Depending on how your company is set up, you can transfer transactions you have entered in the trading
area to the back office area. The back office area includes functions for checking and changing
transactions. Some of the key postprocessing activities include:
y Enhancing transaction data, for example, adding missing information that is needed for processing.
y Preparing postings and payments, for example, checking the accounts to be used later on in the
automated processes. If you have not done so already, you must assign an account assignment
reference and payment details to the transaction. You need this information in order to post the CFM
flow in Financial Accounting (see account assignment reference).
y Generating correspondence in the form of dealing slips, confirmation letters, or confirmation files.
y Position management tasks, such as securities account transfers.
When you save the settlement activity the system changes the activity category of the transaction to
document that it has been checked and processed in the back office.

7UDQVDFWLRQ6HWWOHPHQW
$FFRXQWDVVLJQPHQWUHIHUHQFH
D '*X/)?CED F
6@ 7? ,*X % ¡ )?/@ *
" L = (' *q¢ nVV
7UDQVDFWLRQ3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
Company code 1000

Product type 51A Fixed-term deposit
Transaction type 100 Investment
D Curr. Effective FTyp House bk Acct ID Payment Pmnt req.

- UNI Deuba GIRUN
+ UNI Deuba GIRUN
 SAP AG 2001

You can check, change, or add information that is relevant for posting and payment. If you have not
done so already, you must assign an account assignment reference and payment details to the
transaction. You need this information in order to post the CFM flow to Financial Accounting.
Depending on how you set up your system, you can have the account assignment reference or the
payment details for the particular business partner appear as default values, which you can then change
or enhance.
The system supports PXOWLSOHOHYHO payment methods. By entering a bank chain, you can process
payments via several banks. Up to 3 intermediate banks are supported.

&RUUHVSRQGHQFH&RQILUPDWLRQ0DQDJHPHQW
z 'LIIHUHQWLDWHVEHWZHHQRXWJRLQJFRQILUPDWLRQDQG
FRXQWHUFRQILUPDWLRQ
z &RQILUPDWLRQVWDWXVIRUFRUUHVSRQGHQFHFDQEHVHHQLQ
WKHILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQXQGHU
6WDWXV
z 6WDWXVPDQDJHPHQWIRUFRXQWHUFRQILUPDWLRQFDQEH
FRQWUROOHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHEXVLQHVVSDUWQHULQWKH
VWDQGLQJLQVWUXFWLRQV&XVWRPL]LQJ
z 0RQLWRUVRYHUGXHFRXQWHUFRQILUPDWLRQV
z 2SWLFDODUFKLYLQJRIFRUUHVSRQGHQFH
z &RUUHVSRQGHQFHRYHUYLHZDQGFRUUHVSRQGHQFHPRQLWRU
 SAP AG 2001

You can define for each business partner whether counterconfirmation is required for external
correspondence. You do this in the business partner standing instructions.
The system updates the confirmation status of the transaction on the 6WDWXV tab.
Ö Executed, matched (counterconfirmation has been received and matched).
You can store correspondence in an optical archive. To do this, you must have set the $UFKLYLQJ2SWLFDO
DUFKLYLQJ indicator in the Customizing activity 'HILQH&RUUHVSRQGHQFH7\SHV for each relevant
correspondence type. To use this function, you also need to have an external optical archive. You access
the archived correspondence from the transaction display. If you are in the display/change mode for a
transaction, you can also display the correspondence activities by choosing *RWR!&RUUHVSRQGHQFH By
double-clicking on a line, you activate the archive link monitor and display the document.
The correspondence monitor provides new functions that enable you to process and monitor your
correspondence. These functions have been developed on the basis of the existing correspondence
overview, and enable you to:
y Call up an overview of the current processing status
y Set the counterconfirmation status to "matched" directly from the monitor (manual match)
y Generate scheduled correspondence directly from the monitor
y Repeat correspondence that has already been generated
The correspondence monitor was developed using the SAP List Viewer.

&RQILUPDWLRQ/HWWHUV
&UHDWH&RUUHVSRQGHQFHRQ%DVLVRI3ODQQHG5HFRUGV
6HOHFWLRQV
&RPSDQ\FRGH
7UDQVDFWLRQ WR
&RUUHVSRQGHQFHW\SH "
3URGXFWFDWHJRU\
3URGXFWW\SH
7UDQVDFWLRQW\SH

%XVLQHVVSDUWQHU
3RUWIROLR
7UDGHU
(QGRIWHUPGXHGDWH WR
(QWHUHGFKDQJHGRQ WR
(QWHUHGFKDQJHGE\

 SAP AG 2001

The system generates correspondence on the basis of the settings you have made in Customizing and in
the standing instructions, using the planned records that are created when you create, change, or reverse
transactions.
To access the selection screen for confirmation letters from the application menu, choose %DFN2IILFH!
&RUUHVSRQGHQFH!2XWJRLQJ&RUUHVSRQGHQFH
You can select transactions to be confirmed.
In the display the confirmation letters appear one after the other. You can print them out from the
display.

$FFRXQWLQJ)XQFWLRQV
5HOHDVH
3RVWLQJV
3D\PHQW
9DOXDWLRQ
&RUSRUDWHDFWLRQV
8VHUDXWKRUL]DWLRQ
/LPLWPDQDJHPHQW
 SAP AG 2001

In the accounting area you process the relevant account-based activities in the subledger and transfer
posting information to the general ledger in Financial Accounting.
You can set up your system in such a way that a transaction must be released by one/several (other)
employees before it can be posted.

$XWRPDWLF0DQXDO3RVWLQJ5HOHDVH
3URGXFWW\SH
7UDQVDFWLRQW\SH
3RVWLQJUHOHDVH ;
$XWRPDWLF
5HOHDVH
7UDGLQJ %DFNRIILFH 3RVWLQJ
 SAP AG 2001

In the money market, foreign exchange, and derivatives areas, you can opt for automatic release, or
require transactions to be released by a second employee.
If you want the transactions to be released for posting automatically (as opposed to explicit release by a
user), you must select the 3RVWLQJUHOHDVH field in Customizing. This setting is dependent on the product
type and transaction type. In this case, the transactions can be posted without being released first.
Manual posting release: If you want the transactions to be released for posting by a second user, leave
this field blank.

5HOHDVH:RUNIORZ2YHUYLHZ*UDSKLF
6WDUWZRUNIORZ
UHOHDVH
K£ ) H +¤)H -?¥ XH +¤)H - C % ) JH +¤)H
% ¤)H % ¤)H % ¤)H
,QER[
VWDSSURYDO VWDSSURYDO VWDSSURYDO
RUUHMHFWLRQ RUUHMHFWLRQ RUUHMHFWLRQ
* $ $ * $
5
,QER[
QGDSSURYDO QGDSSURYDO
RUUHMHFWLRQ RUUHMHFWLRQ
$ 5
5
$ UGDSSURYDO ,QER[
RUUHMHFWLRQ
$ 5
,IDWUDQVDFWLRQLVUHMHFWHGLWFDQEHFKDQJHGUHYHUVHG
 SAP AG 2001

Key components of the CFM transaction release process:
The integration of organizational management in the SAP Business Workflow

(organizational plan, task distribution according to responsibilities and job
descriptions, dynamic task distribution for the runtime from the context of the
workflow and the objects processed)
The integration of release management in the SAP Business Workflow
(organizational plan for the release, consideration of the release strategies that
can be customized in CFM for the runtime of the workflow)
The release procedure includes approval or control procedures with organizational factors.
If a release is rejected, the system informs the person who last processed the transaction, and the
transaction can be changed or reversed. The transaction may then have to be released again.

5HOHDVH:RUNIORZ&XVWRPL]LQJ,
Release procedure Company code 1000 IDES AG

Release conditions
Release procedure
PTyp TTyp Rel. proc.
51A 100 ;
51B 100 ;
60A 101 ;
Release procedure Company code 1000 IDES AG

Release conditions Product type 51B Fixed-term dep. internal
Transaction type 100 Purchase
Release conditions
ACat Act. Rel. nec. Rel. steps Trans. processing
10 01 ; 1 1
 SAP AG 2001

You can specify in Customizing the procedure you want to use for each company code, product type,
and transaction type. This is why you define release procedures and release conditions.
In the release conditions you enter the release step and an entry relating to the transaction release
according to the activity category and activity.
The release steps define how many people are required to release an object (for example, 1 release step:
2 employees (1 employee, 1 person responsible for the release).
You use the transaction release to define what the application does while the transaction is in the release
workflow (for example, ongoing transaction during the release workflow is not permitted).

5HOHDVH:RUNIORZ&XVWRPL]LQJ,,
'LVSOD\VWDQGDUGUROH757075B'($/
&UHDWHUHVSRQVLELOLWLHV ([DPSOH
Description from to
Company code 1000
Product type 51B
Transaction type 100
Curr. approval level 1
$JHQWDVVLJQPHQW Release steps 2
&)0ZRUNIORZVWRIVWHSV
$FWLYDWHHYHQWOLQNDJH
 SAP AG 2001

¦ Make the standard Customizing settings for the Workflow.

¦ Display standard role 20000034 (TRTMTR_DEAL): The standard role describes the responsibilities for
the individual approval steps.
The agents must be found in the system for the individual approvals. To do this
a standard role has been built into the Workflow definition, which is, however, still empty. To
define the agents for an approval level, you have to FUHDWHDUHVSRQVLELOLW\ in the standard role and
DVVLJQDXVHUSRVLWLRQ to it.
(Change the responsibilities so that the "momentary approval level" is set to the corresponding value,
and the "release steps" are set to the maximum number).
¦ You have the option of entering several users/positions, which are notified if deadlines are exceeded
(standard role 20000035).
¦ Since this workflow is triggered by an event, you must activate the event linkage of the workflow used.
¦ For more information about the release workflow, see the IMG documentation.
¦ In the reporting overview, you can see the releases for each CFM transaction, when they were processed,
and by whom.

$FFRXQWLQJ
)RUH[VSRWWUDQVDFWLRQ3XUFKDVH86'5DWH
K#+* ¨§ 6) % +7

' % ?C/ n© )© )
Kª+* T 6) % +7Q/)H n©M«©
6HOHFWLRQRIWKH
),LQWHUIDFH WUDQVDFWLRQVDQGIORZV
UHOHYDQWIRUSRVWLQJ
)LQDQFLDO$FFRXQWLQJ
 SAP AG 2001

¦ The CFM information required for posting is passed on to Financial Accounting via an interface. The
posting logic is based on the generated flow types, the account assignment reference for the financial
transaction, and the company-specific account determination settings.
¦ You can post individual flows either to G/L accountsor to customer accounts. If you want to make
active payments, you can use the FI payment program on the basis of postings made to customer
accounts. You can also use an extended payment program for payment requests. This allows you to
make active payments on the basis of postings made to G/L accounts. In this case, payment requests are
first generated in CFM, and are then paid individually or jointly using the CFM payment program. The
following four posting alternatives are possible:
1. */DFFRXQWVZLWKRXWSD\PHQWUHTXHVWV: Flows are posted to bank clearing accounts
and cleared using the manual or automatic bank statement functions.
2. &XVWRPHUDFFRXQWVZLWKRXWSD\PHQWUHTXHVWV: Flows are posted to customer accounts
and cleared when you trigger active payments using the FI payment program.The postings
made to the bank clearing accounts are cleared by the bank statement.
3. */DFFRXQWVZLWKSD\PHQWUHTXHVWV: See the unit 3D\PHQW3URJUDPIRU3D\PHQW
5HTXHVWV
4. &XVWRPHUDFFRXQWVZLWKSD\PHQWUHTXHVWV: The system generates a payment request
for each flow and posts the payment to the payment request clearing account and customer
account. The subsequent payment run makes the postings to the bank clearing accounts.

7UDQVDFWLRQ3RVWLQJ
YLD*/DFFRXQWV
,'(6
)7GHSEDOVKHHWDFFW +RXVHEDQNDFFRXQW
'HXED 'HXED )7GHS
LQYHVWPHQW
c P P d +RXVHEDQN
'(8%$
%DQNFOHDULQJDFFRXQW
d P P c c )L[HGWHUPGHSLQY

d 6WDWHPHQWIURPEDQN
 SAP AG 2001

¦ If you conclude financial transactions with a business partner that is also one of the company’s KRXVH
EDQNV, you do not usually make active payments.
Instead, the business partner (= your house bank) makes the corresponding postings to the bank account.
The flows posted to the bank clearing account by the Transaction Manager are cleared when you receive
the bank statement.
Example: G/L account posting without payment request
¦ Posting transactions:
You define the balance sheet account in the account assignment reference. This includes the account
number for the balance sheet account and additional information (such as the business area).
You specify the account assignment reference in the transaction on the $GPLQLVWUDWLRQtab.
¦ You cannot change the balance sheet account in the account determination settings for transaction
posting.
¦ The bank clearing account is read from the payment details entered in the transaction. You can change
the account to be used for posting in the account determination settings.

3RVWLQJ$FFRXQW$VVLJQPHQW5HIHUHQFH
)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW 'DWH 6HSW

7HUPPRQWK 81,
'HXWVFKH%DQN 1RPLQDOLQWHUHVW
Company code 1000

$FFWDVVUHI 6KRUWWH[W
'% 'HXWVFKH%DQNGHSRVLWDWQRWLFH
'% 'HXWVFKH%DQNIL[HGWHUPGHSRVLW
'HWDLOV

%XVLQHVVDUHD
&RVWFHQWHU
*/DFFRXQW
 SAP AG 2001

¦ The account assignment reference determines the G/L account (balance sheet account) to which the
financial transaction is posted. By using different account assignment references, you can structure your
balance sheet positions in a differentiated manner.
¦ In addition to the account for position management, you can also enter a cost center and a business area
in the account assignment reference (the cost center is only relevant for posting category 4).
¦ The account assignment reference is part of account determination, which you can set up in Customizing
according to the currency and/or account assignment reference. This flexibility enables you to
differentiate between postings. For example, in account determination for revenue and expense postings
for securities you might want to differentiate between affiliated and non-affiliated security issuers on the
basis of the account assignment reference.
¦ In the money market, foreign exchange and derivatives areas, you enter the account assignment
reference directly in the financial transaction. In the securities area, however, you enter the account
assignment reference in the position indicator.

'HWHUPLQLQJWKH$FFRXQW$VVLJQPHQW5HIHUHQFH
2YHUYLHZ
&KDUDFWHULVWLF &KDUDFWHULVWLF
9DOXHJURXS!9DOXHV

$
%
&
'
(
DOOYDOXHJURXSFRPELQDWLRQV
6HOHFWDVUHTXLUHGIRUDXWRPDWLFGHWHUPLQDWLRQ
RIDFFRXQWDVVLJQPHQWUHIHUHQFH
$VVLJQDFFRXQWDVVLJQPHQWUHIHUHQFHVWRWKH
FRPELQDWLRQVVHOHFWHG
 SAP AG 2002

¦ When you create a transaction, you need to enter information about the balance sheet account to which
the postings are to be made later on.
¦ You can enter the account assignment reference in the transaction or position indicator manually, or have
it generated automatically by the system. The automatically generated account assignment reference is
entered as a default proposal, but you can change it if necessary.
¦ When you have the account assignment reference determined automatically, it reads certain transaction
characteristics and uses these values to determine the corresponding account assignment reference.

$FFRXQW$VVLJQPHQW5HIHUHQFH'HWHUPLQDWLRQ
&KDUDFWHULVWLFV9DOXHV
+^(¬q1®4\¯^°²±³4³1³ µ2°1º °1®J »\º °?®¼1q 4®4 °q ·4M ®J·

+`1 1®J` \¬q° ´¡µs°1®1¶` , °·
¸ \¯`¶®\®1J,¹
OH
Stock type
PS
([D
Execution type (American or European)
Type of shareholding
µ2°qº °®4 °1¯(®q¼1 1®J °M ·M ®4· Holding share comp. code position
Holding share sec. acct position
Issue currency Shareholding indicator comp. code
Product type Shareholding indicator sec. acct position
Balance sheet indicator sec. acct position
Industry key
Stock form indicator
SCB asset group indicator comp. code
SCB asset group indicator sec. acct position
Foreign Investment Law indicator
'RXEOHFOLFN Balance sheet grouping indicator comp. code
½\¾¿ ÀJÁÆ
½\¾¿ ÀÁÂqÃ Ä1À1ÅÆ ÒsÓ`Ô
ValGrp
Æ¾¿ Õ À4Ã Ã ÁJÌ4ËXÍ
ÒsÌÝ ÞJÁÃComment
ÕhÖ`× ß1à Ý ÆÆ × Ã ¾ÌË
ValGrp
Ç Ê4Ä4ËX¾¿XComment
ËJÀ1Ã Ã Á4ÌJËXÍ ØÙsÚ Ù Ã Ý Ð Ý Æ Ñ)Ú Ä1À1ÌJá
È Î^ÀÃ ÄqÅÁ ÛsÜ`Ü Û^¾ÌÝ Æ Ñ Ü^Ã ÄqÌÁ
É Ï2Ð Ñ Á4Ã ÏsÐ Ñ ÁÃ

 SAP AG 2002

¦ The system determines the account assignment reference automatically on the basis of certain
characteristics you select in Customizing. The characteristics available originate from business partner
management or position data.
You have to define values for the characteristics. These are then grouped into evaluation groups.
¦ You make the settings for automatic account assignment reference determination on a company code
basis. You can make the settings for selected product categories and/or for the contract type (such as
securities). In the latter case, the settings apply to all product categories with this contract type.
The system determines the account assignment reference in two steps:
1. If a corresponding entry is available at product category level, the system uses this account
assignment reference.
2. If no corresponding entry is found at product category level, the system uses the relevant
specification for the contract type.
If no account assignment reference is determined in either 1 or 2, you have to enter one manually in the
position indicator.

&XVWRPL]LQJ$FFRXQW'HWHUPLQDWLRQ
â(ãäsåqæªâSç2èBéqå^ê
ësì2ä2íêBî ãnäsï ö(ø2ø2ù î ísçqêxî ãnä úû1úsü ô ë2â;ýhâ(ãäsåqæP÷;ç`èxé\åê
öí^í`ãnì2ä`êxî äsó ôõ ç2è ê+ã2ñnç`í`íê,ï ä`ê3å`èxäsç^ê3î ãnähçhù^í õ ç2è êãhñ+ç^ísí\ãnìnä^ê3ï
öí^í`ãnì2ä`ê?ðåqê3åsèx÷î äsç^ê,î ãnä öísí\ã+ìä^êç\ïsï`î ónä2÷åhä`ê

ðå^ñ3î ähå;òå^êMêBî äsóï öísíqêïqæn÷ sãnù öísíqêç\ïsï`î ó+ä2÷;å2ä^êè3å^ñ ô ìèBèå2äsí\æç\ísíqê
ôõ å`ísé 2ü
ôõ çsèênã2ñ+ç^í`í^ãnìä`ê3ï û û 2ûqúsú
û `ú`ú^úsú
!ûqúsú
" ü`ú^úsú
öí`í`ãnì2ä`ê,ï ònæh÷hãnù ï " ü`ú^úû
öSø2øù î ísçêxî ãnä úû1úsü ô ëâOýâ(ãnähåæP÷;ç`èBé\å\ê öí^í`ãnì2äsê+ï\æ2÷hã+ù ï

ÿã2ï\êBî äsóPï`øhå`ísî ñBî í\ç^ê3î ãnä2ï öí^í\ê+ï\æ2÷hã+ù ðå^ïsí`èxî ø`êBî ã+ä
ësù ãhþEê ænøså û^ûú`ú ÿç\æ÷;åsä^ê+ê,è3çhähï^ç`íê
ðî è,å`í\êxî ã+ä ô ãn÷ø ç2ä2é.í2ù å\ç2èBî äsó

ðå 2î ê ú û
ç2ù ç`äsíså
ô è,å nî ê ü`ú
ç2ä2é.í2ù å^ç2è3î äsó
û! û ä^ê3åsè,å`ï\êè3å\íså`î #2å!
ðãíhì÷Oåhä^êêMænøså ònö ÿnã2ïêxî äsóí`çê û
 SAP AG 2001

¦ You make the account determination settings for the relevant application in Customizing.
In the account determination settings you specify the accounts you want to use for posting activities.
This involves entering the posting specifications, the account symbols used, and the accounts assigned to
the symbols.
¦ Prerequisites for posting transactions in Financial Accounting:
y You must have created all the necessary accounts and made the correct settings
y The document types must appear in the document types table and allow postings to the required
account types.
y The number range linked to the document type must have internal number assignment in Financial
Accounting
y The posting periods must be open for posting.

$FFRXQW'HWHUPLQDWLRQ3RVWLQJ6SHFLILFDWLRQV

:;5959%&<3-9)'>=@?BADC %&E '
2323EG+ 598),+ %&-

:F HBIH9J KML3NPO(NQ%&-*4 ?RA 8BS7TU4)
)LHOGVHOHFWLRQ
$&%('*),+.-0/1'32*405(+ 67+ 58),+ %&-9'
LBE %0VW) ? 2*4 I9IH*H $&8 ?BA 4B-9)3),Sd8B-9'*8*5)7] m
K\% A 23]
X\+ Sg4*5j)a+ %_- n
XY4 C + ) Z0H I [Y83E 8B-054
K;S4(^_+ ) J9H ` [Y83-3TM5(E 498BSa+ -0/
Xb%35(< A 4B-9)3) ? 2*4 = : $&%B'9),+.-0/c589)d4*/3%@S ? IU`
LBE %0VW) ? * 2 4 I9IH*H $_8 ?BA 43-9)3),Sd8B-9'*8*5j)a]lk

K\% A 23]
X\+ Sg4*5j)a+ %_- n
XY4 C + ) Z0H I [Y83E 8B-054
K;S4(^_+ ) J9H e = < C E 4*^B/B4BS&8*5959%&<3-9)'
Xb%35(< A 4B-9)3) ? 2*4 = : $_%('9),+.-0/f58)g4*/B%&S ? Ie
LBE %0VW) ? * 2 4 Ie9H*H $&8 ?BA 4B-9)3),Sd8B-9'*8*5)7]Fm

X+ Sg4*5j)a+ %&- m K\% A 23]
XY4 C + ) Z0H ` [Y83-3TM5(E 498BSa+ -0/
K;S4(^_+ ) J9H Z3]I] I h.-9)4BSg4'9)@Sg4*54B+ i04*^
Xb%35(< A 4B-9)3) ? 2*4 = : $_%('9),+.-0/f58)g4*/B%&S ? `jZ
 SAP AG 2001

¦ The posting specifications describe the type of posting in an abstract form, and are independent of the
chart of accounts. In each case, you have to define the document type, posting key, account symbols, and
posting category.
¦ The accounts are determined on the basis of the flow type, the direction of the flow, and the payment
transaction.
Direction: + for inflow
- for outflow
Payment transaction: x for postings made via customer accounts
+ for pure G/L account postings
¦ You define debit/credit postings using the corresponding posting keys (40: debit posting to a G/L
account; 50: credit posting to a G/L account).
¦ The document type controls postings in Financial Accounting (SA: G/L account document).

$FFRXQW'HWHUPLQDWLRQ3RVWLQJ6SHFLILFDWLRQV
•3RVWLQJFDWHJRU\
3RVWLQJVSHFLILFDWLRQV
yUp{z9|}\~
0|U |jF(| |

•)ORZ7\SHV !0|U |j ~~j
!0|U |jF(|j
0|U |jFy0d ..
opq9r stuwv
±1±³1³ ¸ ®q ¬1qº1 ® °1·q°
0|U |jl@.\|
jjj ~~jUQ*|j jU |
x
x
±J´1³³¢¡2`S \1º1 4 ° °4·4
x j0|U@9|j jU |!
0|U@; ~j~U
0|U@9|jj
x
0|U@y0.g G U
x
0|U@M\|0j
y0 G Q*|j jU |
y0 G l3j ~UU~U
y0 G Q*|jj
y0 G Qy*U .
y0 G ;_|0U
• 3D\PHQWWUDQVDFWLRQ not via customer accts U &\|*Q*|j UU |

x
x
k
via customer accts
 SAP AG 2002

¦ Accounts are determined in two stages:

'HWHUPLQHSRVWLQJVSHFLILFDWLRQV
The posting specifications are determined on the basis of the flow type, the payment transaction, and the
direction of the flow. The posting specifications describe the type of posting in an abstract form, and are
independent of the chart of accounts. In each case, you have to define the document type, posting key,
account symbols, and posting category.
The posting category indicates the nature of the account you are posting to, and is defined for debit and
credit postings respectively:
1: Balance sheet account (from account assignment reference)
2: Subledger account (customer account)
3: Bank clearing account
4: Profit/loss account (G/L account with cost center)
5: G/L account (G/L account without cost center)
5HSODFHDFFRXQWV\PEROV
The account symbols are replaced by actual G/L accounts, which you can change if necessary. Posting
category 1, however, is an exception. The account symbol for the balance sheet account is replaced by
the balance sheet account defined in the account assignment reference, but it cannot be changed.

$FFRXQW'HWHUPLQDWLRQ$FFRXQW6\PEROV
6\PEROV

£¤*. yjU r~!
£YrUr |d 0 ÃjaÃ ¥ o¦ x ¦Y*~q}l| ~
§3¨!¨ ©ª«!¬ ®ub¯©°

£@*jqj};9
±v!¨²³ ´!¬.³ ©«
µ µ
µ µ
º »9t° t«¨!v&¼v v!¬t¨ ¨©ª«!¬
¶ µ ½ ª¯° v ¾¿v²t ¨¨ ©ª«!¬.
· »9t«À¨° v t²³ «¿
¸¹ ºa¹ º Á «!¬.v²v ¬j².v ¨v³ Âv ¾
µ µ
µ µ
 SAP AG 2002

¦ An account symbol describes a group of general ledger accounts. You can use it to group together
similar types of postings (such as expenses for write-offs).
The symbols can be used for several sets of posting specifications. You fine-tune posting activities by
setting different control parameters for assigning G/L accounts.

$FFRXQW'HWHUPLQDWLRQ$FFRXQWV$OORFDWLRQ
$FFRXQWV

&KDUWRIDFFWV,17

y9d r~ 9qj}M*
Ä £brr | 0 Ãj Ã Ä(ÅÆ µ Æ ©«va®buYt²Àva¬

¼t²G¬©Çt!¨¨ ©ª«!¬G

Á sË
§3¨!¨ ©ª«!¬t ³ ¿«ubv«!¬
§3¨!¨ ©ª«!¬ ®ub¯©° §(¨ä¬t³ ¿« ¹ ²Gv!Ç ¹ Ä ª²²Gv«¨® È(É Ê¤t¨ ¨ ¬

µ
µ
· Ì ÌÍ ÌÌÌÌ!ÌÌ!ÌÌ!ÌÎ
· Ì ½ ± ÌÌÌÌ!ÌÌ!ÌÌ ºÏ
¸ ¹ ºa¹ º
Ì Ì ¶!Ð · º,Ñ!Ñ
µ
µ
µ
µ
 SAP AG 2001

¦ You assign one or several G/L accounts to the account symbol for the corresponding chart of accounts. If
you assign several accounts, you differentiate the assignments according to currency and/or account
assignment reference. This enables you to make differentiated control settings for the various posting
activities.
¦ When you post a transaction, the system reads the G/L account specified in the house bank account field
for the transaction. This G/L account is then transferred to the corresponding subaccount using the
account symbol from the posting details based on the account assignment reference and/or currency.
¦ Example:
You conclude a fixed-term deposit in USD. In the payment details for the transaction the USD current
account 113150 has been defined via the house bank and account ID. If the payment is made in USD, the
account 113150 is replaced the bank clearing account 113155; payment amounts in all other currencies
are posted to account 113105.

3RVWLQJD7UDQVDFWLRQ6XPPDU\
Fixed-term dep. 1 month 4.5% Acct assignment ref. DB000001

= 4B29)HBI I9IH9HÒn L3+ k04*^n.)g4BS A ^B4B23] IUÓ.H9H9H*Ó H9H9H
Ô 5)ÕHBI I9Ie9H m L3+.-*8BE9Sd432*8 ?BA 4B-) IUÓ.H9H9H*Ó H9H9H
Ô 5)ÕHBI Ie9H9H m Ö % A + -*8BE*+G-9)d4BSd49'9) `*Ó ×9J9H %DODQFHVKHHWDFFRXQW

DFFWRDFFWDVVLJQPHQWUHIHUHQFH
3RVWLQJVSHFLILFDWLRQV
)ORZW\SH
I9IH0H1n XY4 C + )¤[Y8BE 8B-054ÒKSd4*^@+ )¤[¤8B-3T
I9Ie0H m XY4 C + )¤[Y8B-3T KlSg4*^_+ )@[¤83E 83-054
Ie9H0H m XY4 C + )¤[Y8B-3T KlSg4*^_+ )@h -9)a]9Sd4054B+ i(4*^
î*à ï9ÜUâ0ð.ÛÜ*Ýñòâ*Ü9ó(ôéßßÛæjæå9æUæå è_é0Ú*êß9ë Üé0Ýgà Ú9ìéjßjßÛ&ææåæçUí Ù ÚjÛÜ9ÝÜÞjÛÝÜjßÜ0à áÜjâWãjäå*æçç
± Ä Ä
±
± Ä
Á «!Âv ¬.uYv«!¬ ºaØ Ñ!ÑÑ!Ø ÑÑ Ñ Å ËY¾v´©³ ¬ ºaØ Ñ!Ñ ÑØ Ñ ÑÑ
s9©ub³ «t° · ØÐ Î Ñ
s9©u ¹ ³ «!¬.v²Gv¬ · ØÐ Î Ñ
Å ³ «t° ³ «!¬.v²Gv¬
ºØ Ñ Ñ!ÑØ Ñ!Ñ Ñ Å ³ «t°
²Gv´ta®uYv«!¬ ².v´ta®uwv«!¬ ºØ Ñ Ñ!ÑØ Ñ!Ñ Ñ
 SAP AG 2001

¦ Any financial transactions you process in the money market, foreign exchange, derivatives and securities
areas result in business transactions that have to be entered in the accounting system. These automatic
postings and the corresponding offsetting postings to FI accounts may be carried out online.
¦ The posting specifications control how the individual business transactions are posted. They contain the
posting and account determination rules for each flow type. You make the corresponding settings in
Customizing.
¦ For each flow that is due to be posted, the system determines the correct posting specifications on the
basis of the flow type.
¦ The document type and the posting keys for the debit and credit sides of the posting represent are passed
on directly to Financial Accounting as control information. The posting category and the account
symbols are used by the CFM posting interface to determine the actual G/L and subledger accounts.
¦ When you display the accounting document (such as an FI document), you see that the posting
originated from CFM. To do this, go to the display for the FI document in the general ledger ('LVSOD\
'RFXPHQW, transaction FB03) and choose (QYLURQPHQW -> 2ULJLQDOGRFXPHQW. This gives you an
overview of the CFM flows behind the posting in Financial Accounting.

&DVK)ORZVLQ&DVK0DQDJHPHQW
7UDQVDFWLRQHQWHUHG
Product type PXX
3D\PHQWGHWDLOV3'PDLQWDLQHG 3D\PHQWGHWDLOVQRWPDLQWDLQHG
From PD: House bank Deuba From business partner/customer

Account: DBGiro Group: E2
From Cust.: Prod.Type PXX: Level TB From Cust.: ProdType PXX: Level TP
Payment details added !!!

Transaction is posted Transaction is posted
Account DBGiro:
FI account master: Level B5
 SAP AG 2001

¦ It is essential that you enter payment details if you want to post a transaction, since the house bank
entered in the payment details also determines which of your own accounts are applicable for posting.
¦ Since the bank accounts specified in the payment details are known when you execute a posting, the cash
flow is displayed in Cash Management at the level that is assigned to the corresponding bank (clearing)
account in the account master record.

)LQDQFLDO7UDQVDFWLRQVDQG&DVK0DQDJHPHQW
K8*'3õcNF8B-*8*/34 A 43-9)aO0X+ '323E 8 ?fö 4i04BE '
[w83-3T'
~ ÷*~U r !Ã Ã !Ã Ã !Ã!GÃ !ÃGÃ |~j
÷ o0.~ø ü,ý,þ û þaþ,þ ú7úaúû úaú,ú ú,úaú û ú7ú7ú ú7ú7ú û ú7ú7ú ú7úaúû úaúaú
ÿ,ÿaÿ ÿaÿ7ÿ ÿ,ÿaÿ ÿ7ÿ7ÿ
( ¥ o¦ù ~|Ud ü ýaþ û 7

þ þaþ ú7ú7ú!û ú,úaú ú,úaú û ú7ú7ú úaú7ú û ú7úaú úaú,ú!û úaú,ú

oÃ *|jU ú7úaúû úaú7ú ü,ý7þ û þ7þaþ ú,úaú û ú7ú7ú úaú7ú û ú7úaú úaú,ú!û úaú,ú
0|U |~ ú7úaúû úaú7ú ú7úaúû ú7úaú ú,úaú û ú7ú7ú úaú7ú û ú7úaú úa
7ú,
aú!
û úaú,ú
 SAP AG 2001

¦ You can set up your system to display the transaction cash flows in Cash Management at different levels,
depending on the activity category or status. The level then gives you qualitative information about the
transaction.
¦ Example: Concluded forex transaction: DB level - foreign exchange
Posted forex transaction: B5 level - bank clearing account
After receipt of bank statement: B0 level - bank account

&)07UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHUDQG&DVK0DQDJHPHQW
)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW &)0 9LDDFWLYLW\DW

LQYHVWPHQW IL[HGWHUPGHSRVLWOHYHO
3RVWIORZV &KDQJHWRFOHDULQJ
&)0
WRFOHDULQJDFFRXQW DFFRXQWV
&OHDULQJSRVWLQJYLD &KDQJHWREDQN
EDQNVWDWHPHQW DFFRXQWOHYHO
 SAP AG 2001

¦ Above example: Process flow that describes how the relationships between the CFM Transaction
Manager and Cash Management and the postings to Financial Accounting might be represented in the
system.
¦ Payments are usually triggered by the business partner (bank) and processed further by the automatic
bank statement function in Cash Management.

%DVLF3ULQFLSOHVRI$UFKLYLQJ
0RWLYDWLRQ
z 6WHDG\LQFUHDVHLQYROXPHRIGDWDIRUWKHHQGXVHU
z 3RRUSHUIRUPDQFHGXHWRGDWDEDVHRYHUORDG
z &RVWVRILQYHVWLQJLQQHZKDUGZDUH
$UFKLYLQJUHTXLUHPHQWV
z 6WRUHILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQVRXWVLGHWKH56\VWHP
z 'HOHWHDQGUHORDGDUFKLYHGGDWDWRWKH56\VWHP
z $XWRPDWLFFRQYHUVLRQLIWDEOHVWUXFWXUHVDUHFKDQJHG
z 2QOLQHDUFKLYLQJDQGDUFKLYHPDQDJHPHQW
z 'DWDFRPSUHVVLRQ
z &RQQHFWLRQWRH[WHUQDODUFKLYLQJV\VWHP
 SAP AG 2002

¦ The archiving function allows you to removePDVVGDWD that you no longer require in the system, but still
want to store for evaluations, from the database. Transactions are written to archive files by DUFKLYLQJ
REMHFWV which describe the structure and composition of the data. These files can be stored in other
media.
¦ SAP’s archiving concept is based on the $UFKLYH'HYHORSPHQW.LW (ADK). If you start the archive
management function from an application, the special features that are specific to the application
(archiving objects, programs) are DOUHDG\SUHFRQILJXUHG
¦ The archiving program first JHQHUDWHVDQDUFKLYHILOH The files to be archived are then UHDGin the
background and ZULWWHQto the archive file.
¦ Once the archive file has been closed a SURJUDPLVVWDUWHG DXWRPDWLFDOO\ or PDQXDOO\ - which reads the
archived data from the archive file and deletes it in the database. This procedure guarantees that only the
data that has been stored correctly in the archive file is deleted from the database.
¦ Archive files, whose contents were removed from the database by the deletion program, can be stored
externally. There are several options available (depending on the hardware you have), such as
$UFKLYH/LQN. If the archiving system of an external provider is connected via ArchiveLink, this system
is instructed to DXWRPDWLFDOO\store the processed file after a deletion program has run successfully. You
can also store the file PDQXDOO\ at a later date.

$UFKLYLQJ0RQH\0DUNHW)RUH[DQG'HULYDWLYHV
7UDQVDFWLRQV
z %HIRUHWUDQVDFWLRQVFDQEHDUFKLYHGWKH\PXVW
IXOILOWKHIROORZLQJFULWHULD
5HDFKWKHPLQLPXPUHWHQWLRQSHULRGVSHFLILHGLQ
&XVWRPL]LQJ
'HILQH&RPSDQ\&RGH'HSHQGHQW0LQLPXP5HWHQWLRQ3HULRG
'HILQH3URGXFW7\SH'HSHQGHQW0LQLPXP5HWHQWLRQ3HULRG
7KHFXUUHQWEXVLQHVVWUDQVDFWLRQPXVWKDYHEHHQVHWWOHG
LIQHFHVVDU\VHH&XVWRPL]LQJIRUWUDQVDFWLRQW\SHVRU
UHYHUVHG
$OOIORZVUHOHYDQWIRUSRVWLQJPXVWKDYHEHHQSRVWHG
7KHWUDQVDFWLRQPXVWKDYHUHDFKHGWKHUHTXLUHG
FRQILUPDWLRQVWDWXV
 SAP AG 2001

You can enter the PLQLPXPUHWHQWLRQSHULRGof financial transactions in Customizing using the following
Customizing activities:
y Define &RPSDQ\&RGH'HSHQGHQWMinimum Retention Period
y Define 3URGXFW7\SH'HSHQGHQWMinimum Retention Period
Using selection criteria, you can restrict the number of financial transactions to be archived. Remember
that financial transactions can only be archived in a certain status. The archiving object TRTM_FTR has
been preconfigured to require you to start the 'HOHWLRQUHSRUWPDQXDOO\ You can change this using the
transaction AOBJ.
This transaction allows you to make further technical settings for the archiving object TRTM_FTR, such
as the name and path of the archive file.

The financial transactions to be archived are stored in a physical file according to a platform-
independent file name and path name.

Note that the archiving function GHOHWHV archived financial transactions from the R/3 System. We
therefore recommend that you do a WHVWUXQ first in order to identify any errors. You can only reload
financial transactions that have been archived correctly.

3URFHVV2ULHQWHG$UFKLYLQJ&KHFNV
3URGXFWFDWHJRU\
2UGHU
&RQWUDFW ([SLUDWLRQ
3RVWLQJVWDWXV
$UFKLYH
1RWSRVWHG
&RQILUPDWLRQVWDWXV
1RWFRQILUPHG
$UFKLYH
 SAP AG 2001

You can DUFKLYHCFM-TM financial transactions in the Money Market, Foreign Exchange, and
Derivatives areas. The functions available use the standard R/3 functions of the $UFKLYH'HYHORSPHQW.LW
(ADK). This ensures that the data in the archive files is stored consistently. The ADK supports external
archiving systems via the Archive Link. The archiving functions for financial transactions include:
y Archiving and deleting financial transactions
y Reloading archived financial transactions
y Managing archive files
When a financial transaction is archived, the system runs numerous technical and business checks to
ensure data consistency.

You can now also DUFKLYHRUGHUVthat have not been executed (such as order expiration). This function is
useful if the due date of the order has been exceeded and the transaction is therefore no longer relevant.
To prevent orders from being archived or deleted by accident, the system checks the minimum retention
period of the transaction.

8QLW6XPPDU\
z <RXQRZKDYHDQRYHUYLHZRIWKHFRPSOHWH
WUDQVDFWLRQSURFHVVLQWKH6$36\VWHP
z <RXFDQXVHWKH&)07UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHUWR
PDSWKHWUDQVDFWLRQSURFHVVDWDOOVWDJHVWUDGLQJ
EDFNRIILFHUHOHDVHDQGDFFRXQWLQJ
 SAP AG 2001


([HUFLVHV
8QLW7UDQVDFWLRQDQG3RVLWLRQ0DQDJHPHQW3URFHVV
7RSLF7UDGLQJ
• Transaction processes in SAP CFM
You want to gain an overview of the complete transaction process, from

the trading stage through to the back office and accounting.
1-1 Assignment to cash management levels:
Assign your product type PXX for fixed-term deposits to cash management levels for
your company code:
Make the assignment for the activity category:

10 Contract
Assign your product type PXX to the following levels:

Level: "TB" Time deposits: Banks
Level: "TP" Time deposits: Subledger
You can use the following entries as a reference:

− Product type 51A
− Activity category 10
1-2 Create another fixed-term deposit in the application using your product type PXX
(term: 3 months).
Check the cash position of your fixed-term deposit in Cash Management for the level
"Time deposits: Banks".

([HUFLVHV
7RSLF%DFN2IILFH

2-1 Correspondence
Check the possible correspondence types for money market transactions in

Customizing.
Assign the following forms to your fixed-term deposit product type PXX. Note the
different activity categories:
o Confirmation letter Form: F_TR_ CONFIRM_ALL

o Dealing slip Form: F_TR_DEALER_ALL
Generate a dealing slip and a confirmation letter for a newly-created transaction in the
application.
If necessary, match the counterconfirmation for external correspondence. You can do

this using the 0DQXDO,QFRPLQJ&RQILUPDWLRQV function or the &RUUHVSRQGHQFH
0RQLWRU

([HUFLVHV
7RSLF$FFRXQWLQJ

3-1 Account assignment reference
Define an account assignment reference for fixed-term deposits in UNI and USD:
CXX00001 (XX = your group ID) for fixed-term deposits in UNI

(fixed-term deposits in UNI # FI G/L account 116113)
CXX00002 (XX = your group ID) for fixed-term deposits in USD

(Fixed-term deposits in USD # FI G/L account 116114)
Create fixed-term deposits in UNI and USD in the application. Use the account
assignment references you have just defined.

3-2 Automatic account assignment reference:
Define automatic account assignment references for fixed-term deposits in UNI and
USD
For your company code, choose product category 510 for fixed-term deposits.
Select the following DGGLWLRQDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV:

− Product type
− Currency of financial transaction.
Define a new FKDUDFWHULVWLFJURXS for business partner CXX, and enter a valid
FKDUDFWHULVWLFYDOXH&;;.
Define a new FKDUDFWHULVWLFJURXS for product type PXX, and enter a valid
FKDUDFWHULVWLFYDOXH3;;.
Define two new FKDUDFWHULVWLFJURXSV for the currency of the financial transaction and
enter the valid FKDUDFWHULVWLFYDOXHV81,DQG86'.
5HDVVLJQWKHDFFRXQWDVVLJQPHQW UHIHUHQFH using the new characteristic groups for the

business partner, the product type, and the currencies. The characteristic "transaction
type" is not taken into consideration.
− Use the account assignment reference CXX00001 for fixed-term deposits in UNI
with business partner CXX.
− Use the account assignment reference CXX00002 for fixed-term deposits in USD
with business partner CXX.
− Check the possible FRPELQDWLRQV
Create fixed-term deposits in UNI and USD in the application. Does the system default
to the correct account assignment reference?

3-3 Account determination
Create a fixed-term deposit in UNI with the following conditions:

− Nominal interest
− Full repayment on maturity
Check the account determination settings for your fixed-term deposit in the chart of
accounts INT.
Define account determination for your own flow types:

− BXX1 Principal increase
− BXX3 Full repayment upon maturity
− BXX5 Nominal interest
Copy the following sample flow type settings (menu: (GLW!&RS\):
1HZVHWWLQJ &RS\UHIHUHQFH
)7\SH )7\SH 'LUHFWLRQ 3PQWWUDQV

BXX1 Principal increase 1100 - +
BXX3 Full rep. upon maturity 1120 + +
BXX5 Nominal interest 1200 + +
− Create a fixed-term deposit in UNI in the Treasury application. Check the cash
flow. Post the transaction in Financial Accounting (update run).
To which G/L accounts are postings made? What changes can you see in Cash
Management?

6ROXWLRQV
7RSLF7UDGLQJ
1-1 Assignment to cash management levels:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
Ö$VVLJQ3ODQQLQJ/HYHOV
2QO\HQWHU\RXURZQFRPSDQ\FRGH
1-2 Create fixed-term deposit:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
Check cash position in Cash Management:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
Ö$FFRXQWLQJÖ7UHDVXU\Ö&DVK0DQDJHPHQWÖ,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHPÖ
5HSRUWVIRU&DVK0DQDJHPHQWÖ/LTXLGLW\$QDO\VHVÖ&DVK3RVLWLRQ
<RXPD\QHHGWRXVHWKHYDULDQW$&7)6%DQNDQGFKDQJHWKHFRPSDQ\FRGH

6ROXWLRQV
7RSLF%DFN2IILFH
2-1 Check correspondence types:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ&RUUHVSRQGHQFHÖ'HILQH&RUUHVSRQGHQFH7\SHV
Assign forms:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHPHQWÖ&RUUHVSRQGHQFHÖ'HILQH&RUUHVSRQGHQFH$FWLYLWLHV
%XWWRQ1HZHQWULHV
Generate dealing slips and confirmation letters:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
0RQH\0DUNHWÖ%DFN2IILFHÖ&RUUHVSRQGHQFH Ö2XWJRLQJ&RUUHVSRQGHQFH
Match counterconfirmations:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
0RQH\0DUNHWÖ%DFN2IILFHÖ&RUUHVSRQGHQFH Ö,QFRPLQJ&RQILUPDWLRQV
PDQXDO
(QWHUWKHGDWD\RXUHFHLYHIURP\RXUEDQNRU\RXUEXVLQHVVSDUWQHU7KHV\VWHP
PDWFKHVWKHFRQILUPDWLRQVDQGDVVLJQVWKHWUDQVDFWLRQWR\RX6DYH\RXUHQWULHV

6ROXWLRQV
7RSLF$FFRXQWLQJ
3-1 Define account assignment reference:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
$FFRXQWLQJLQ2SHUDWLYH9DOXDWLRQ$UHDÖ$FFRXQW$VVLJQPHQW5HIHUHQFHÖ
'HILQH6HWWLQJV
%XWWRQ1HZHQWULHV
Create fixed-term deposits in UNI and USD:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
3-2 Automatic account assignment reference:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
$FFRXQWLQJLQ2SHUDWLYH9DOXDWLRQ$UHDÖ$FFRXQW$VVLJQPHQW5HIHUHQFHÖ
'HILQH$XWRPDWLF'HWHUPLQDWLRQ
Create fixed-term deposit investments in UNI and USD. Does the system default to the
correct account assignment reference?
$SSOLFDWLRQ
%XWWRQ$GPLQLVWUDWLRQ

3-3 Check account determination for fixed-term deposits in the chart of accounts INT:
&XVWRPL]LQJ
$FFRXQWLQJLQ2SHUDWLYH9DOXDWLRQ$UHDÖ$FFRXQW'HWHUPLQDWLRQÖ'HILQH
6HWWLQJV
'HILQHDFFRXQWGHWHUPLQDWLRQIRU\RXURZQIORZW\SHV

&RQWHQWV
z Posting via G/L accounts
z Standard payment program
z Payment program for payment requests
 SAP AG 2001


8QLW2EMHFWLYHV
WR
z Explain the various posting options in the CFM

Transaction Manager
z Configure and run the payment program for
payment requests
 SAP AG 2001


2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
%DQNV
,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


%XVLQHVV6FHQDULR
z <RXZDQWWRIDPLOLDUL]H\RXUVHOIZLWKWKHYDULRXV
RSWLRQVIRUWUDQVIHUULQJWKH&)0GDWDWKDWLV
UHOHYDQWIRUSRVWLQJWR)LQDQFLDO$FFRXQWLQJ
z ,QDGGLWLRQWRPDNLQJSUHOLPLQDU\SRVWLQJVWR
EDQNFOHDULQJDFFRXQWV\RXFDQDOVRXVHWZR
SD\PHQWSURJUDPVWRPDNHDFWXDOSD\PHQWV
7KHVHSD\PHQWSURJUDPVZLOOQRZEHH[SODLQHG
LQPRUHGHWDLO
 SAP AG 2001


3URFHVVLQJ3D\PHQW7UDQVDFWLRQV

3RVWLQJWREDQNFOHDULQJDFFRXQWV
&OHDULQJRQEDVLVRIEDQNVWDWHPHQW
+RXVHEDQN
$FWLYHSD\PHQWXVLQJWKHSD\PHQW
SURJUDP
%XVLQHVVSDUWQHU
([DPSOH6XEVLGLDU\
,'(6$*
(85
 SAP AG 2001

If you conclude financial transactions with business partners that are also one of the company’s KRXVH
EDQNV, you do not usually make active payments.
In this case, the business partner (= house bank) makes the corresponding postings to your bank account.
The flows posted to the bank clearing accounts by the Transaction Manager are cleared when the bank
statement is received.
If you conclude financial transactions with business partners that are QRWKRXVHEDQNV, you have to make
an active payment (triggered by your company or your business partner). Two programs are available in
CFM for making payments:
y You can use the ),SD\PHQWSURJUDP, which is based on postings to customer accounts. The business
partner must have been created in the system as a customer. The postings from CFM-TM generate
open items in the customer account, which are then settled using the FI payment program ("Automatic
payment transactions".).
y Alternatively, you can use the 3D\PHQWSURJUDPIRUSD\PHQWUHTXHVWV, which processes payments on
the basis of G/L accounts. In this case, the posting generates "payment requests", which are then
settled by the payment program for payment requests ("Automatic payment transactions for payment
requests").

3URFHVVLQJ3D\PHQW7UDQVDFWLRQV2YHUYLHZ
"!#%$ &'( "%!#)*%# &'+

)RXUDOWHUQDWLYHV
3RVWWR*/DFFRXQWV
3RVWWR*/DFFRXQWVZLWKSD\PHQWUHTXHVW [

3RVWWRFXVWRPHUDFFRXQWV [
>3RVWWRFXVWRPHUDFFRXQWVZLWKSD\PHQWUHTXHVW [@
 SAP AG 2002

Use of the four alternatives - Examples:

1) Transactions with the house bank are usually processed as pure G/L account postings.
2) Transactions with a partner that is not a house bank, without using a customer account.
Payment using the payment program for payment requests. 3D\PHQWUHTXHVWV are documents
used to generate payment media. They are usually generated automatically when you post
flows that are due. The payments are then made individually or jointly using the payment
program for payment requests (F111).
3) Transactions with a partner that is not a house bank, using a customer account. Payment
using the FI payment program.
4) Transactions with a partner that is not a house bank, using a customer account. Payments
made with the payment program for payment requests in order to use the netting option.

3RVWLQJWR*/$FFRXQWV
%DQN %XVLQHVV +RXVHEDQN

SDUWQHU
6WDQGLQJ
LQVWUXFWLRQV
' &XUUHQF\ +RXVH $FFW 3D\PHQW 3D\PHQW
EDQN ,' DFWLYLW\ UHTXHVW
81, '% *,581
81, '% *,581
 SAP AG 2002

In the transaction, you enter the information required for processing payments on the 3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
tab.
In the case of a pure G/L account posting, you must enter the following:
y ': Direction of the flow (inflow, outflow)
y &XUUHQF\: Currency of the flow
y +RXVHEDQN: House bank key (ID)
y $FFRXQW,': Key for the account with the house bank

3RVWLQJ
YLDFOHDULQJDFFRXQWV
,'(6
)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLWSRVLWLRQ +RXVHEDQNDFFRXQW
'HXED 'HXED )L[HGWHUP
GHSRVLW
c P P d
+RXVHEDQN
'(8%$
%DQNFOHDULQJDFFW
c
d P P c )L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW
d 6WDWHPHQWIURPEDQN
 SAP AG 2001

If you conclude financial transactions with business partners that are also house banks, you do not
usually make active payments. In this case, the corresponding flows are posted to the bank account by
the business partner. The flows posted to the bank clearing accounts by the Transaction Manager are
cleared when the bank statement is received.

3RVWLQJWR&XVWRPHU$FFRXQWV

SDUWQHU
6WDQGLQJ
LQVWUXFWLRQV
7UDQVDFWLRQ3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
' &XUUHQF\ +RXVH $FFRXQW 3D\PHQW 3D\HUHH 3%DQN 3PQW

EDQN ,' DFWLYLW\ PWK
+-,.0/ "/ ,

81, '% *,581 ; % 8
+-,.0/ / ,
81, '% *,581 ; % 8
 SAP AG 2002

In the transaction, you enter the information required for processing payments on the 3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
tab.
The entries required for payment using the FI payment program on the basis of customer accounts
include:
': Direction of the flow (inflow, outflow)
&XUUHQF\: Currency of the flow
+RXVHEDQN: House bank key (ID)
$FFRXQW,': Key for the account with the house bank
3D\PHQWDFW\: X = Posting to customer account
3D\HUHH: Person receiving the payment (usually the business partner)
3%DQN: Partner bank ID (encodes the bank details - bank and account - of the payee)
3D\PHQWPHWKRG: Procedure used to process payments (in the payment run), for example U=
transfer
If you make postings to customer accounts and use the FI payment program, the system uses the house
bank specified for the customer. If no house bank has been specified for the customer, the system uses
the house bank defined in account determination for the FI payment program. The entries on the
3D\PHQWGHWDLOV tab in the transaction are not used.

«YLDFXVWRPHUDFFRXQWV
)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW
)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW +RXVHEDQN ,'(6 %URNHU

SRVLWLRQEURNHU &XUUHQWDFFRXQW'HXED
3D\PHQW
c P P f RUGHU
d P +RXVHEDQN
'(8%$ 3D\PHQW
&XVWRPHUEURNHU %DQNFOHDULQJDFFRXQW
e P P c f P P e

P d
c VWIL[HGWHUPGHSRVLW e 3D\PHQW
7ULJJHU35UXQ
d QGIL[HGWHUPGHSRVLW f %DQNVWDWHPHQW
 SAP AG 2001

If you want to make active paymentV using the FI payment program, you must post the payment flows to
customer accounts. In other words, you have to create the business partner as a customer The postings
from CFM-TM generate open items on this customer account, which are then settled by the FI payment
program ("Automatic payment transactions").

$XWRPDWLF3D\PHQW),3D\PHQW3URJUDP
3D\PHQW &XUUHQW
FRQWURO SDUDPHWHUV
0DVWHU 'RFXPHQWV
3URSRVDOUXQ
3URSRVDOGDWDVHW
(GLW
SURSRVDO
3D\PHQWUXQ
3ULQWGDWDVHW
3ULQWSURJUDP
&KHFN
3D\PHQW 3D\PHQW ,'2&
DGYLFH VXPPDU\
Bank transfer
QRWH
Eurocheck
 SAP AG 2001

One of the options is to make postings to customer accounts and use the FI payment program. This
option is used in the loans area, for example.
In connection with account determination in the CFM posting interface, you can control whether
payment activities involve a flow of funds. You can post transactions directly to the payer/ee in order to
generate corresponding payment documents using the payment program.
Functions of the payment program:
y Automatic selection of the items to be paid and any exceptions (such as blocked items)
y Generation of payment documents (customer accounts / vendor accounts)
y Generation of payment data
y Generation of payment lists and logs
y Generation of payment media (such as checks) for this payment data by print programs
You usually carry out a payment proposal run first. This run creates a proposal data set, which you can
edit prior to the actual payment run.

$XWRPDWLF3D\PHQW3D\PHQW3URJUDPIRU35

SDUWQHU
6WDQGLQJ
LQVWUXFWLRQV
%XVLQHVVSDUWQHU3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
' &XUUHQF\ +RXVH $FFRXQW 3D\HUHH 3DUWQ 3PQW ,QGLY 3PQW
EDQN ,' EDQN UHTXHVW SPQW PWK

+-,1.0/2"/ ,"
81, '% *,581 % ; (68
81, '% *,581

+3,1.0/2"/ ,
% ; ; (68
 SAP AG 2002

To use the payment program for payment requests, you must enter the following data:
': Direction of the flow (inflow, outflow)
&XUUHQF\: Currency of the flow
+RXVHEDQN: House bank key (ID)
$FFRXQW,': Key for the account with the house bank
3D\PHQWDFWLYLW\: Blank = G/L account posting, or X = customer account posting
3D\HUHH: Person receiving the payment (usually the business partner)
3DUWQHUEDQN: Partner bank ID (encodes the bank details - bank and account - of the payee)
3D\PHQWUHTXHVW:
Blank = Do not generate a payment request
X = Generate a SD\PHQWUHTXHVW
,QGLYLGXDOSD\PHQW:
Blank = This payment flow may be settled together with other flows, for example for netting purposes.
3D\PHQWPHWKRGV: List of payment methods used to process payments in the payment run
If you post payments using the payment program for payment requests, you can define in Customizing
which bank account should be used - the bank account specified in the payment details for the CFM
transaction, or the bank account found using account determination for the payment program.

YLDDFOHDULQJDFFRXQWIRUSD\PHQWUHTXHVWV
)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW
)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW +RXVHEDQN ,'(6 %URNHU

SRVLWLRQEURNHU &XUUHQWDFFRXQW'HXED
3D\PHQW
c P P f RUGHU
d P +RXVHEDQN
'(8%$ 3D\PHQW
&OHDULQJDFFWIRU35
&XVWRPHUDFFRXQW %DQNFOHDULQJDFFRXQW
e P P c f P P e

P d
c VW)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW e 3D\PHQW
7ULJJHU35UXQ
d QG)L[HGWHUPGHSRVLW f %DQNVWDWHPHQW
 SAP AG 2002

If you conclude transactions with a partner that is not a house bank, and you want to make active
payments, you have the option of generating "payment requests". Payment requests are processed using
a special payment program - the payment program for payment requests.
Example:
y You conclude several transactions with a partner that is not a house bank.
y When you post the fixed-term deposit, the system automatically generates a payment request.
y Payment requests are managed in the clearing account for payment requests.
y You can group/net the payments from payment requests.
y To make the payment, you trigger a payment run in accounting, and the system transfers the payment
amount to the bank clearing account.
y At the same time, it generates a payment medium, which is passed on to the house bank.
y When the bank statement arrives, the payment is posted to the bank account.

$XWRPDWLF3D\PHQW3D\PHQW3URJUDPIRU35
3D\PHQW &XUUHQW
FRQWURO SDUDPHWHUV 3D\PHQW
0DVWHU UHTXHVW
3URSRVDOUXQ
'RFXPHQWV
3URSRVDOGDWDVHW
(GLW
SURSRVDO
3D\PHQWUXQ
3ULQWGDWDVHW
3ULQWSURJUDP
&KHFN
,'2&
Bank transfer
3D\PHQW 3D\PHQW
Eurocheck DGYLFH VXPPDU\
QRWH
 SAP AG 2001

Functions of the payment program for payment requests:

y Generation of payment requests (PR): Automatic request selection
y Generation of payment documents (customer accounts / vendor accounts / G/L accounts): Transfer
posting to the corresponding bank (sub-)accounts for each house bank and currency
y Generation of payment data
y Generation of payment lists and logs
y Generation of payment media (such as checks) for this payment data by print programs
You usually carry out a payment proposal run first. This run creates a proposal data set, which you can
edit prior to the actual payment run.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV
<RXPXVWPDLQWDLQWKHUHOHYDQW&XVWRPL]LQJVHWWLQJVIRUWKH
VWDQGDUGSD\PHQWSURJUDP
<RXPXVWPDNHDGGLWLRQDOVHWWLQJVIRUWKHSD\PHQWSURJUDPIRU
SD\PHQWUHTXHVWV
8VH
7KHSD\PHQWSURJUDPVHWWOHVSD\PHQWUHTXHVWV35
,WFDQEHXVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKSRVWLQJVWR
&XVWRPHUDFFRXQWV
9HQGRUDFFRXQWV
*/DFFRXQWV
 SAP AG 2002


3D\PHQW5HTXHVWV&XVWRPL]LQJ
4
'HILQHWKHQXPEHUUDQJHIRUSD\PHQWUHTXHVWV
6HWXSDQGDVVLJQDSODQQLQJOHYHOIRUSD\PHQW
UHTXHVWVIRU&DVK0DQDJHPHQW
'HILQHDFOHDULQJDFFRXQWIRUSD\PHQWUHTXHVWVLQWKH
FKDUWRIDFFRXQWV
$VVLJQWKLVFOHDULQJDFFRXQWWRWKHFRPSDQ\FRGH
:KHUHDSSURSULDWHPDNHWKHUHOHYDQWVHWWLQJVLQWKH
6WDQGLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV6HWWKH3D\PHQWUHTXHVWDQG
,QGLYLGXDOSD\PHQWLQGLFDWRUVHQWHUDSD\PHQW
PHWKRGLQWKHOLVWRISD\PHQWPHWKRGV

 SAP AG 2001


3D\PHQW3URJUDP3DUDPHWHUV
$XWRPDWLF3D\PHQW7UDQVDFWLRQV3DUDPHWHUV
F:G1HL=17<;HI=8A 6H t 808A ;CA E7:OO E0W f"G7@:HiA DhJ=O =@D<;UA E7<J
536798:<;>= b9b Yc

d
Y e_e"ee F0EJ<;UA 7W]8:@;N= b9b NY cdkY e_e"ee
? 81=17@;%A BCA D:@;%A E"7 ckjlm ^_=<`@;#Q@:G1HL=17@;_M67IE"7 b9b nY lokY ee"ee
F0:
GHI=17<;KJLDE7@;CMNEO
P EHRQ:7<GIDE18= o o<o1c ;%E c
o@o@o
F:<GH9=7<;H9=@;%SE8J p3q
T = O =D<;UA E7<J
V M%A WA 7 r"u'5'+ws vKZu'V x ;>E
[#=1780EM1:D@D@E"67<; ;E
P 6@J@;>EHL=1M:D<DE607<; ;E
X-YNZ :D<DE67@; a1A J
\61MK;US=1MJ@=O =D;%A E7J

f_ED6HL=7<;KJI=7<;K=MK=@8g6Qh;%E b9b >Y cdkY e_e"ee
f_ED6HL=7<;KJi6Qh;E Y
 SAP AG 2001

You can use ILHOGVHOHFWLRQFRQWURO to show or suppress the fields for the LQSXWSDUDPHWHUV.
In Customizing for bank accounting, you can define which of the following fields should appear and be
ready for input when payment parameters are entered:
y Vendor accounts
y Customer accounts
y G/L accounts
y Created on
y Origin
You can use 2ULJLQ indicator to define the applications for which payments should be generated.

2ULJLQ,QGLFDWRU
z 1HZ2ULJLQLQGLFDWRUWRVSHFLI\WKHDSSOLFDWLRQIRUZKLFK
SD\PHQWVDUHWREHJHQHUDWHG
z 3RVVLEOHYDOXHV),%/75&0%775,+&
757075/2
z ,ISD\PHQWUHTXHVWVKDYHGLIIHUHQWRULJLQV
3D\PHQWUHTXHVWVFDQEHQHWWHG
4
<RXFRQWUROKRZSD\PHQWUHTXHVWVDUHQHWWHGLQ
4
&XVWRPL]LQJIRUEDQNDFFRXQWLQJ
7KHSD\PHQWSURJUDPRQO\XVHVWKHDWWULEXWHVRIWKH
4
LQGLFDWRUIRUZKLFKWKH*URXSLQJIODJLVVHW
 SAP AG 2001

The RULJLQLQGLFDWRU is a new field. You use it to specify the application for which you want to generate
payments, and to determine how the payment should be processed. SAP provides origin indicators for
the following applications that generate payment requests:
y TR-CM-BT (Bank account transfers from Cash Management)
y TR-TM (Transactions from the CFM Transaction Manager areas: money market, foreign exchange,
securities, and derivatives)
y TR-IHC (Flows from In-House Cash)
y TR-LO (Transactions from mySAP Banking Loans)

3D\PHQW3URJUDP)LHOG6HOHFWLRQ&RQWURO
z <RXFDQGHWHUPLQHZKLFKILHOGVDUH T =O =D

;A E7@J
VKRZQRUVXSSUHVVHGRQWKHVFUHHQ / !_/
IRUHQWHULQJWKHSD\PHQW w,z"#"$..#"
SDUDPHWHUV y >,#$1..#">
|~} $1..#"N
9HQGRUDFFRXQWV
4
y %,$>,1z{_
&XVWRPHUDFFRXQWV
4
*/DFFRXQWV
4 f3A J;UM%A a06<;A E"7
" $1.C/ ,
&UHDWHGRQ
4
2ULJLQ
4
 SAP AG 2001

In the global settings for bank accounting in Customizing, you can define which of the following fields
should appear and be ready for input in the screen for entering payment parameters:
y Vendor accounts
y Customer accounts
y G/L accounts
y Created on
y Origin
If you do not want to make any restrictions, and always want to make payments for all the items that are
due, do not select any of the fields.

&XVWRPL]LQJ2ULJLQ,QGLFDWRU
'LVSOD\9LHZ2ULJLQ6HWWLQJV2YHUYLHZ
"K k

2¥ ¥ ¬ £<¤¥ ¦ §¦ 0 £ªª¢ ±°±U _²´³ ¢µ¥ ¶ ¢¦ ¦ ªC 2¥ ¤µ¢U ¥
®<¯ ¶ ¯ ¨ ¨<©ªª¢ 2 U« 2
®-¯¡ ¡¢""
®-¯
U #1"
z &XVWRPL]LQJVHWWLQJVIRUHDFKRULJLQLQGLFDWRU
'RQRWFKHFNDYDLODEOHDPRXQWV<1
4
$FFRXQWGHWHUPLQDWLRQIURPDSSOLFDWLRQRUSD\PHQWSURJUDP
4
WRGHWHUPLQHEDQNFOHDULQJDFFRXQW
*URXSLQJIODJ8VHWKHDWWULEXWHVRIWKLVLQGLFDWRU<1
4
 SAP AG 2001

The Customizing settings for the origin indicator let you control how the payment transactions are
processed:
y Should the payment program check the available amounts? If you set this indicator, the payment
program for payment requests does not check the available amounts.
y Should the bank clearing account for the payment be taken from account determination for the
application or account determination for the payment program? If you do not set this indicator, the
system takes the bank clearing account from account determination for the payment program. The
result of account determination in the application is ignored.
y If payment requests with different origins are netted, should the system use the attributes defined for a
certain origin? If you set this indicator, the payment program uses the attributes for this origin when
you net payment requests with different origins.
If you want to net payment requests with different origins, you must assign these origins to each other in
Customizing (IMG step: %DQN$FFRXQWLQJ!%XVLQHVV7UDQVDFWLRQV!3D\PHQW7UDQVDFWLRQV!
3D\PHQW+DQGOLQJ!$VVLJQ2ULJLQWR&RPELQDWLRQRI3D\PHQWV).

3D\PHQW3URJUDP2WKHU1HZ)HDWXUHV
z <RXFDQHGLWWKHIROORZLQJLQWKHSD\PHQWSURSRVDO
3D\PHQWVEORFN
4
3D\PHQWPHWKRGVFKDQJH
4
+RXVHEDQNVFKDQJH
4
z 5HYHUVLQJSD\PHQWV
5HVHWFOHDULQJSRVWLQJUHYHUVHSD\PHQWGRFXPHQW
4
5HVHWFOHDULQJSRVWLQJVIRUSD\PHQWUHTXHVWV
4
5HYHUVHRULJLQDOWUDQVDFWLRQ
4
 SAP AG 2001

·
You can now edit the payment proposals for payment requests (block payments, change payment
methods and house banks). The authorization to make these changes is controlled by a new authorization
object )B3$<54 This object is used to control authorization for creating, reversing and displaying
payment requests.
·
The system works out the due date of the payments by counting back the number of days between the
value date at the house bank and the date of the payment run, taking the factory calendar into
consideration. Payments that are not yet due are shifted to the next payment run. To count back the due
date, you must specify the difference in days between the payment run and the value date at your house
bank.
·
You can now fully reverse a payment. Transaction F8BW reverses the clearing posting for payment
requests. Reversing a payment, including reversal of the original transaction, involves the following
steps:
1. Reset clearing posting, reverse payment document
2. Reset clearing postings for payment requests
3. Reverse original transaction

1HWWLQJ*HQHUDO,QIRUPDWLRQ
z ,I\RXFRQFOXGHWUDQVDFWLRQVZLWKEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUVWKDW
DUHQRWKRXVHEDQNVLQRWKHUZRUGVZKHUHSD\PHQWVDUH
DFWXDOO\H[FKDQJHGWKHUHPD\EHFDVHVZKHUH\RXZDQWWR
VHWWOHVHYHUDOWUDQVDFWLRQVWRJHWKHU
4
Example: Fixed-term deposit in EUR and fixed-term loan in EUR
4
The open payment amounts are netted out and only the net amounts are
actually paid.
4
Advantage: Reduced transaction costs and bank charges
z )RUWKLVSXUSRVH\RXFDQJURXSWUDQVDFWLRQVLQQHWWLQJ
XQLWV
 SAP AG 2001

·
You can currently net transactions in the money market, foreign exchange, derivatives and securities
areas, or across several of these areas.
·
You can either net G/L account payments using G/L account payment requests, or payments posted to
customer accounts using customer account payment requests.

1HWWLQJ3URFHVV
z 0DNLQJDQHWWLQJDUUDQJHPHQW
$OOQHWWLQJDUUDQJHPHQWVDUHH[SOLFLWDJUHHPHQWV
4
EHWZHHQEXVLQHVVSDUWQHUVLQRUGHUWRVLPSOLI\SD\PHQW
SURFHVVLQJ
7KHWUDQVDFWLRQFRQILUPDWLRQFRUUHVSRQGHQFHFRQWDLQVD ¸¹Cº» ¼ ½ ¾@¿KÀ ¼ ¹Uº
4
UHIHUHQFHWRWKHRWKHUUHODWHGWUDQVDFWLRQV
z 5HVXOWDIWHUFUHDWLQJDQHWWLQJXQLW
&KDQJHVWRWKHUHOHYDQWWUDQVDFWLRQILHOGVDUHEORFNHG
4
SDUWLFXODUO\GXHGDWHDPRXQWVKRXVHEDQNGDWDDQGSD\PHQW
GDWD
7KHWUDQVDFWLRQVDQGFRUUHVSRQGLQJSD\PHQWUHTXHVWVDUH
4
DVVLJQHGDFRPPRQJURXSLQJUHIHUHQFH
 SAP AG 2001

·
Payment requests have a special *URXSLQJWHUPfield. You can use this field to control which payment
requests you want to separate from others (application).
·
All the payment flows and payment requests linked to the same netting unit are given the same unique
grouping term which separates them from other payment requests. This indicates that they should not be
grouped together with other requests.

1HWWLQJDQG3D\PHQW5HTXHVWV
&RQWUDFW 6HWWOHPHQW 1HWWLQJ 3RVWLQJ
ÁnÂ Ã>Ä Å Ä Æ Ç È É Ç Ä Ê ÅKÂ É Ç É ÁnÂ ÃKÄ Å Ä Æ Ç È É Ç Ä Ê ÅKÂ É Ç É Ë2È Ü É Ç ÜKÞ Ü Ç Ç Ä Å ßKà Ç Ü Ãá â É Ç É Ënê á Ì Ê Æ Ç ê Ý Ê ënÆ
Ë2Ì ÍÊ ÎË Û Ï Â É Æ Ä ÒÕÂ É É Ç É Ó Á ÌNÁ2ÔÁnÍ È Õ É Ç ÅÄ Ö Æ Ä ÇÉ Î Õ Ç Ä Ê Å Ù Ú Ë2Ì ÍÊ ÎË Û Ï Â É Æ Ä ÒÕKÂ É É Ç É Ó Á2ÌNÁ Ô
Á2Í ÈÕ É Ç ÅÄ Ö Æ Ä ÇÉ Î Õ Ç Ä Ê Å Ù Ú Ë2Å Ê É ×Ç × Ì Þ Ü Ç Ä Å ß è É Ý å ÜÂ É Ç Ü × × é Ú
Ë2Ì ÍÊ ÎË Ï Â Ò É Í Í Î Ï Ó Á ÌNÐÑ ÐÐÑ Á2ÐÐ Ô1Ñ Á2Í È Õ É Ç ÅÄ Ö Æ Ä ÇÉ Î Õ Ç Ä Ê Å ÁnÙ Õ Ú Ç × Õ É Ç ×ØË2Ñ Ê Å Ñ Ç ÑÈ É Õ Ç Ë2Ì ÍÊ ÎË Ï Â Ò É Ó Á2ÌNÑ ÐÑ Á ÐÐ Ô
Ñ Á2Í ÈÕ É Ç ÅÄ Ö Æ Ä ÇÉ Î Õ Ç Ä Ê Å Á2Ù Õ Ú Ç × Õ É Ç ×Ó Ü ÇÑ Ý Ü Ñ ÃNÑ Ü Å Ç
Í Í Î Ï Ð Ð Ì É È Ç Å Ü È Ðâ2ã Ð Ûä Ñ â Ü å Ç Æ Õ æ ÜNÛ É Å ç Ð Ñ Ð Ñ ì%Í Ü É Æ Ý Ç Â Õ Ê Ý ÄÈ Ü í Å Ç ä Ënê ä á îÌ Ê Ê ßÆ Ç Ä Å ß Æ
Í Í Î Ï Ð ÐÑ Ð Ñ Á2Õ Ç × Õ É Ç ×ØË2Ñ Ê Å Ñ Ç ÑÈ É Õ Ç Í Í Î Ï Ð ÐÑ Ð Ñ Á2Õ Ç × Õ É Ç ×Ó Ü Ñ Ç Ý ÜÑ ÑÃNÜ Å Ç
ÑÐÐ ÑÐÐ
ôkô
÷1ü@òkõnó
ï0ð2ñòóñ
ôõ>ö ÷òkó øùõõ>ö ò
ú û
ý@ñþ@ÿ~ù<òkõ
&)0 ), ðù ükùkóõ
&)0
),
 SAP AG 2001

·
Netting is a special way of settling transactions together. While you can always settle all transactions at
once, netting only applies to an explicit subset of these transactions.
·
The decision to create a netting transaction is usually made shortly before the payment flows are due,
usually on the same day the transactions are posted. Only then do you know which transactions can be
grouped for net payment (for example, forex spot and forward exchange transactions).
·
You can group flows in netting transactions if the following parameters are the same:
y Company code
y Business partner
y Payment date
y Payment methods
y Settings for other payment program criteria

8QLW6XPPDU\
z <RXQRZKDYHDQRYHUYLHZRIWKHYDULRXV
SRVWLQJDQGSD\PHQWRSWLRQVLQWKH&)0
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHU
z ,QDGGLWLRQ\RXKDYHOHDUQHGWKHSURFHGXUHIRU
QHWWLQJILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQVLQWKH6$3
6\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


([HUFLVHV
8QLW3D\PHQW3URJUDPIRU3D\PHQW5HTXHVWV
7RSLF([HFXWLQJD3D\PHQW5XQ
• Executing a payment run in SAP CFM
You do not have a current account with your business partner, and must
therefore instruct your house bank to make a payment to your business
partner’s bank. You make the payment using the payment program for
payment requests.
1-1 Create a new fixed-term deposit (3URGXFWW\SH 51A, 7UDQVDFWLRQW\SH 100). The start of
the term is today. The business partner is the CITIBANK-BROKER (CITI). Since the
Citibank broker is not a house bank, you need to make a physical payment from your
house bank account at Deutsche Bank. You could also use your partner BPXX.
Look at the payment details in the transaction (the payment details have been proposed
by the system on the basis of the standing instructions entered for Citibank). Pay
particular attention to the settings for the payment program for payment requests.
1-2 Settle the transaction and enter an account assignment reference.
1-3 Post today’s position increase resulting from the transaction. Look at the accounting
document (balance sheet account to clearing account for payment requests).
1-4 Look at the open items in the clearing account for payment requests in Financial
Accounting.

1-5 Carry out the payment run.
− Run date: TODAY

− ID: TRXX (XX = your group ID)
Enter the parameters:
− Posting date: TODAY

− Next payment run on: TOMORROW
− Payment methods: U = Transfer (outgoing payment only)
− Origin: TR-TM
Also enter the details for the additional log:
− Opt for payment method selection in all cases for account 118888.
Save your parameter entries.
Schedule a proposal run to start immediately, and then display the log.
Now schedule the actual payment run (start immediately) and display the log.
The status message "3RVWLQJRUGHUVJHQHUDWHGFRPSOHWHG should appear.
1-6 Look at the cleared items in the FI clearing account for payment requests.
The payment run has cleared the clearing account for payment requests and posted the
payments to the bank clearing account 113105. This account will be cleared when the
bank statement is posted.

6ROXWLRQV
8QLW3D\PHQW3URJUDPIRU3D\PHQW5HTXHVWV
7RSLF([HFXWLQJD3D\PHQW5XQ
1-1 Create a new fixed-term deposit (start of term = today)
$SSOLFDWLRQ
Check the payment details in the transaction.
7DE3D\PHQWGHWDLOV
'%LVHQWHUHGDVWKHKRXVHEDQNDQG*,581DVWKHKRXVHEDQNDFFRXQW7KH
SD\HHLV&,7,7KHNH\IRUWKHSD\HHEDQNGHWDLOVLV/=%7KH3D\PHQWUHTXHVWV
LQGLFDWRULVVHW7KHSRVVLEOHSD\PHQWPHWKRGVDUHGLUHFWGHELWIRULQFRPLQJ
SD\PHQWVDQGFKHFNVDQGWUDQVIHUVIRURXWJRLQJSD\PHQWV
1-2 Settle the transaction and enter an account assignment reference:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
0RQH\0DUNHWÖ%DFN2IILFHÖ)L[HG7HUP'HSRVLWÖ6HWWOH
1-3 Post position increase for the transaction:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
0RQH\0DUNHWÖ$FFRXQWLQJÖ3RVWLQJÖ([HFXWH

1-4 View open items in the clearing account for payment requests in Financial Accounting:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
Ö$FFRXQWLQJÖ)LQDQFLDO$FFRXQWLQJÖ*HQHUDO/HGJHUÖ$FFRXQWÖ
'LVSOD\&KDQJH/LQH,WHPV
(175< $FFRXQW
6HOHFW2SHQLWHPVILHOG
1-5 Carry out payment run:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
0RQH\0DUNHWÖ$FFRXQWLQJÖ3D\PHQWÖ3D\PHQW5HTXHVW
Enter the parameters
%XWWRQ3DUDPHWHUV
Enter the details for the additional log
%XWWRQ$GGLWLRQDOORJ
Save your parameter entries.
Schedule a proposal run to start immediately, and then display the log.
%XWWRQ3URSRVDO
%XWWRQ3URSRVDOUXQORJ
Now schedule the actual payment run (start immediately) and display the log.
%XWWRQ3D\PHQWUXQ
%XWWRQ3D\PHQWUXQORJ
7KHVWDWXVPHVVDJH3RVWLQJRUGHUVJHQHUDWHGFRPSOHWHGVKRXOGDSSHDU

1-6 View the cleared items in the clearing account for payment requests in Financial
Accounting:
$SSOLFDWLRQ
Ö)LQDQFLDO$FFRXQWLQJÖ*HQHUDO/HGJHUÖ$FFRXQWÖ'LVSOD\&KDQJH/LQH
,WHPV
(175< $FFRXQW
6HOHFW&OHDUHGLWHPVILHOG
7KHRULJLQDOSRVWLQJGRFXPHQWQRZFRQWDLQVLQIRUPDWLRQRQWKHFOHDULQJSRVWLQJ
7KHSD\PHQWUXQKDVFOHDUHGWKHFOHDULQJDFFRXQWIRUSD\PHQWUHTXHVWVDQG
SRVWHGWKHSD\PHQWVWRWKHEDQNFOHDULQJDFFRXQW7KLVDFFRXQWZLOOEH
FOHDUHGZKHQWKHEDQNVWDWHPHQWLVSRVWHG

&RQWHQWV
z Data: overview
z Manual maintenance
z Market data transfer from spreadsheets
z Market data file interface
z Datafeed interface
z Market data monitoring
 SAP AG 2001


0DUNHW'DWD0DQDJHPHQW8QLW2EMHFWLYHV
z Explain the various options for entering and
importing market data into the SAP system
 SAP AG 2001


2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
%DQNV
,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


0DUNHW'DWD0DQDJHPHQW%XVLQHVV6FHQDULR
z %HIRUH\RXFDQFRQFOXGHFHUWDLQ
WUDQVDFWLRQVVXFKDVIRUH[RUVHFXULWLHV
WUDQVDFWLRQV\RXPXVWILOOWKHPDUNHWGDWD
WDEOHVLQWKH6$3V\VWHP
z <RXFDQILOOWKHWDEOHVLQGLIIHUHQWZD\V
0DQXDOO\
8VLQJDVSUHDGVKHHW
8VLQJDILOHLQWHUIDFH
8VLQJDGDWDIHHGOLQN
 SAP AG 2001


0DUNHW'DWD2YHUYLHZ
7KHIROORZLQJPDUNHWGDWDFDQEHLPSRUWHGLQWR
WKH6$3V\VWHP
5DWHVDQGSULFHV
z ([FKDQJHUDWHV
z 6HFXULWLHVSULFHV
9LDGDWDIHHG
z 5HIHUHQFHLQWHUHVWUDWHVVXFKDV
9LDILOHLQWHUIDFH
/,%25(85,%25
z ,QGH[HVQRWXVHGLQ05$
z ,QGH[HVQRWXVHGLQ05$
z &RPPRGLWLHVQRWXVHGLQ05$
6WDWLVWLFVGDWD
z 9RODWLOLWLHV
z &RUUHODWLRQV
z %HWDIDFWRUVQRWXVHGLQ05$
 SAP AG 2002

The datafeed function groups the above rate and price information into instrument classes:
Instrument class Name

01 Currencies
02 Securities
03 Interest rates
04 Indexes
05 Commodities
21 Forwards (swap rates)
31 Currency volatilities
32 Securities volatilities
33 Interest rate volatilities
34 Index volatilities

0DUNHW'DWD&XUUHQW([FKDQJH5DWHV
Type From To Valid from Rate Translation ratios

0011 UNI USD 01/01/YYYY 0.57143 1 1
0011 USD UNI 01/01/YYYY 1.75000 1 1
0012 UNI USD 01/01/YYYY 0.57143 1 1
0012 USD UNI 01/01/YYYY 1.75000 1 1
0013 UNI USD 01/01/YYYY 0.57143 1 1
0013 USD UNI 01/01/YYYY 1.75000 1 1
0014 UNI USD 01/01/YYYY 0.55555 1 1
0014 USD UNI 01/01/YYYY 1.80000 1 1
0021 UNI USD 01/01/YYYY 0.57143 1 1
0021 USD UNI 01/01/YYYY 1.75000 1 1
0022 UNI USD 01/01/YYYY 0.57143 1 1
0022 USD UNI 01/01/YYYY 1.75000 1 1
0023 UNI USD 01/01/YYYY 0.57143 1 1
0023 USD UNI 01/01/YYYY 1.75000 1 1
0024 UNI USD 01/01/YYYY 0.55555 1 1
0024 USD UNI 01/01/YYYY 1.80000 1 1
 SAP AG 2001

One way of entering market data in the SAP system is to enter it PDQXDOO\

You first have to define the different types of market data in Customizing.
Examples:
y Define the rate types for exchange rates
y Define the reference interest rate names for interest rates (such as LIB_6_UNI)
y ...

You then maintain the current market data, either in Customizing or in the application.

0DUNHW'DWD&XUUHQW5HIHUHQFH,QWHUHVW5DWHV
Reference Short text Eff. from Int. rate

DM_MRM_3MG 06/10/YYYY 6.0000000
DM_MRM_4JB 06/10/YYYY 6.0000000
DM_MRM_4JG 06/10/YYYY 6.0000000
DM_MRM_5JB 06/10/YYYY 6.0000000
DM_MRM_5JG 06/10/YYYY 6.0000000
DM_MRM_6MB 06/10/YYYY 6.0000000
DM_MRM_6MG 06/10/YYYY 6.0000000
DM_MRM_7JB 06/10/YYYY 6.0000000
DM_MRM_7JG 06/10/YYYY 6.0000000
FIB_6 01/01/YYYY 7.0000000
HYPZINS 01/01/YYYY 5.2500000
HYPZINS 01/01/YYYY 5.5000000
HYPZINS 01/01/YYYY 5.7500000
HYPZINS 01/01/YYYY 6.5000000
HYPZINS 01/01/YYYY 6.0000000
LIB_6 01/01/YYYY 8.1000000

 SAP AG 2001

You can use the 6SUHDGVKHHWfunction (report program RFTBDF_OLE) to call up market data in a
spreadsheet directly from the SAP system and copy the data over.

The former workaround using the file interface is no longer necessary.

A template for Microsoft Excel 97 is delivered with the system. If you use a different spreadsheet or
version, you will need to adjust the template.

0DUNHW'DWD)LOH,QWHUIDFH
*HQHUDWHUHTXHVWOLVW
(QWHUGDWD PDQXDOO\
IURPGDWDSURYLGHU
,PSRUWPDUNHWGDWDILOH
 SAP AG 2001

Another way of entering market data is by importing it to the SAP System using a ILOHLQWHUIDFH.

You collect the rates and prices for which you would like to request the current values (in file format) in
a request list.

You then fill the request file with current data, either manually or via a data provider.

Subsequently, you import the updated file, and the SAP tables are automatically filled with the new
values.

0DUNHW'DWD)LOH*HQHUDWH5HTXHVW/LVW
2XWSXW
)LOHQDPH XVUVDSWUDQVWPSUHTXHVWGDW
,QVWUXPHQWFODVV
&XUUHQFLHV
6HFXULWLHV
,QWHUHVWUDWHV
,QGH[HV
6HOHFWLRQ
.H\ WR
.H\ WR
,QVWUXPHQWSURSHUW\ WR
 SAP AG 2001

This function provides a file interface that can generate a list of the required market data. Within the
request list, data is grouped according to instrument class (currencies, securities, interest rates and
indexes).

Check that the directory path of the output file you have specified is valid before you call up the report.
If no file with the given file name exists, the report creates one. If a file already exists, the report deletes
the contents and fills it with the current request data.

0DUNHW'DWD)LOH,PSRUW)LOH
)LOH
1DPH XVUVDSWUDQVWPSILOH
2WKHU
7HVWUXQ
*HQHUDWHHUURUILOH
 SAP AG 2001

This function inserts data from an input file with a specific file format into the operative SAP market
data tables. Make sure you adhere to this format, since incorrect entries can only be corrected by making
time-consuming manual amendments (format: see report documentation).
© SAP AG FSC110 10-10

0DUNHW'DWD)LOH&XVWRPL]LQJ
6RXUFHRIPDUNHWGDWD:KLFKSURYLGHU"
&RQYHUVLRQWDEOHV
([DPSOH([FKDQJHUDWHV
6$3 'DWDSURYLGHU
5DWHW\SH0 /$67
5DWHW\SH% $6.

(QWHU )LOODXWRPDWLFDOO\
!#"$%"'&($)* "(+-,/.(!.01"2!.(3546"(7+8 .3
PDQXDOO\
 SAP AG 2001

1. Define the data providers for the file interface.

2. For each data provider, you must make the following settings for converting the codes used by
the SAP System into the codes used by the data provider:
- Currencies (currency names, exchange rate types)

- Securities (exchanges, security price types, security ID)
- Reference interest rates (interest rate definitions)
- Indexes (index definitions, index types)

The market data names you have defined in the SAP System need to be entered in the conversion tables.
You can either enter the names manually, or let the system fill the conversion tables with all or some of
the names automatically (IMG step: &UHDWH7DEOHVIRU&RGH&RQYHUVLRQ).
To make the conversion settings, ask your data provider how the names you have defined in the SAP
System are defined externally, in other words, what the related instrument properties are called.
© SAP AG FSC110 10-11

'DWDIHHG$UFKLWHFWXUH
6$3 'DWDIHHGSURYLGHU
&)0DSSOLFDWLRQV
0DUNHW
5LVN 6HFXULWLHV )RUH[
$QDO\]HU
GF
XYQIZ:
S ,QIRUPDWLRQ
C
DE [ Q
7Q
R @7:I U TV SURYLGHUV
BC W
2SHUDWLYH
6$3WDEOHV
P#QI J Q
9;:<: = ([WHUQDO

#QIRIJ :
LQWHUIDFH
SURJUDP 'DWDIHHG
9;:IH5J K
<:I?:
<L
9NM1O
9;:?>A@?:
'DWDIHHG
/RJ VHUYHU
 SAP AG 2001

You can also use the GDWDIHHGLQWHUIDFH to import market data into the SAP system.

To do so, you must install a stock exchange information system and a corresponding partner program
with which the SAP datafeed interface can communicate.
© SAP AG FSC110 10-12

'DWDIHHG,QWHUIDFH
5HIUHVKFXUUHQWGDWD
'LVSOD\FXUUHQWGDWD

6$3 'DWDSURYLGHU
'LVSOD\
PDUNHWGDWD
%XIIHU 5HIUHVK 'DWD

PDUNHWGDWD
nppno7q o7r#q s r#t7s u t#r#u v r#w#v u w7o#u x o#x \ ]_â`b6ced f1g/bih1jed gkb_lem
no#q yr#z s{}t7|u r~v|}w7au oix z(r
yz {}|~|aiz(r
yz r {}r r r |r r ~|iiz(r
rrr
 SAP AG 2001

You can "refresh" selected market data by importing current values via the datafeed interface and writing
them to a market data buffer.
To save the updated values to the market data tables, set the corresponding flag when you request the
market data. (prerequisite: you have also set the relevant flag in the Customizing settings for the
translation table)
You can update the values for all instrument classes, or just selected classes (currencies, securities,
interest rates, indexes, forwards, volatilities for currencies/interest/securities/indexes).

The 'LVSOD\0DUNHW'DWD function displays the market data last imported into the buffer.
© SAP AG FSC110 10-13

'DWDIHHG&XVWRPL]LQJ
z Technical settings
'HILQHGDWDIHHGQDPH
'HILQH5)&GHVWLQDWLRQDVVLJQ
0RGHW\SHRIFRQQHFWLRQ V\QFKURQRXV
DV\QFKURQRXV WUDQVDFWLRQDO
z Conversion tables / translation table
z Schedule market data retrieval
 SAP AG 2001

7HFKQLFDO6HWWLQJV: Settings for communication between the SAP System and the external partner
program; settings for the results/error log.

7UDQVODWLRQ7DEOH: Definition of the required market data and the external datafeed notation; settings for
requesting and refreshing market data.

6FKHGXOH0DUNHW'DWD5HWULHYDO: Definition of the market data to be requested and the request times.
© SAP AG FSC110 10-14

'HILQH'DWDIHHG1DPH
'DWDSURYLGHU 'HVFULSWLRQ
%5,'*( %ULGJH7HOHUDWH77565)(
5(87(56 5HXWHUV66/,QWHUIDFH
3RVLWLRQ (QWU\RI
 SAP AG 2001

In this IMG step, you define the datafeed name. You use this name to make requests from the
application.
© SAP AG FSC110 10-15

'HILQH5)&'HVWLQDWLRQ
5)&GHVWLQDWLRQ 5)&B'$7$)(('B6<1& *DWHZD\
7HFKQLFDOVHWWLQJV
&RQQHFWLRQW\SH 7 7&3,3FRQQHFWLRQ
$FWLYDWLRQW\SH 6WDUW 5HJLVWUDWLRQ 7UDFH
6WDUWRQ
$SSOLFDWLRQVHUYHU ([SOLFLWKRVW )URQWHQGZRUNVWDWLRQ
([SOLFLWKRVW
3URJUDP XVUDZVELQUIFBGDWDIHHG
7DUJHWKRVW KZZGIVDSDJGH
'HVFULSWLRQ
'DWDIHHGFRQQHFWLRQ%ULGJH7HOHUDWHWR6$3
 SAP AG 2001

In this IMG activity, you define all the logical links between the external partner program of the datafeed
provider and the SAP System. These logical links are called RFC (Remote Function Call) destinations
and can be set up synchronously or asynchronously.
© SAP AG FSC110 10-16

6\QFKURQRXV&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
6$3SURFHVV ([WHUQDOLQWHUIDFH
5HTX SURJUDP
HVW
$FWLYLW\
7LPH
([WHUQDO
FRPPXQLFDWLRQ
8QQHFHVVDU\
$FWLYLW\
ZDLWLQJWLPH
([WHUQDO
FRPPXQLFDWLRQ
5HSO\
$FWLYLW\
'DWDWUDQVIHULVQRWUHSHDWHG
LIDQHUURURFFXUV
 SAP AG 2001

If data is transferred synchronously, the external program is responsible for keeping the communication
channel to the SAP function module requesting the data open, since the SAP module waits until it
receives the requested values or an error message. Once the requested data has been transferred, the
connection is deactivated.
© SAP AG FSC110 10-17

$V\QFKURQRXV7UDQVDFWLRQDO&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
6$3SURFHVVHV ([WHUQDOLQWHUIDFH
5HTX SURJUDP
$FWLYLW\ HVW
7LPH
$FWLYLW\ ([WHUQDO
5HSO\
1HWZRUN W ZDLWLQJ FRPPXQLFDWLRQ
PSW VWSDU WLPH
HUURU VWDWWH
$FWLYLW\
\
5HSO UW
W VWSD $FWLYLW\
$FWLYLW\ DW W H PS
QG ([WHUQDO
FRPPXQLFDWLRQ
SO\ GS
DUW
5H Q
SW
HP
$FWLYLW\ DWW
VW
 SAP AG 2001

If the data is transferred asynchronously, the request table is transferred to the external program. The
connection is then deactivated. Once the external program is ready to deliver data, it dials into the SAP
System independently and sends the reply. To use asynchronous communication, you must set up a
special SAP user (user type CPIC, authorization F_DTFEED_ALL).

Advantages:
y Large requests do not block batch jobs and online processes in the SAP System.
y Error situations are minimized (network problems, feed problems, ...).
y If an error occurs, the SAP System automatically repeats the data transfer.
y Market data can be delivered in blocks according to priority.
© SAP AG FSC110 10-18

&RQYHUVLRQ7DEOHV7UDQVODWLRQ7DEOH
z Conversion tables
0DLQWDLQPDQXDOO\

RU
JHQHUDWHDXWRPDWLFDOO\
z Translation table
0DLQWDLQPDQXDOO\

RU
JHQHUDWHDXWRPDWLFDOO\ FRS\PDVWHUGDWD
6SHFLDOFDVH6HFXULWLHV

,PSRUW6HFXULWLHV,QIRUPDWLRQIURP'DWDIHHG3URYLGHU
&KHFNWUDQVODWLRQWDEOH

 SAP AG 2001

© SAP AG FSC110 10-19

'DWDIHHG&RQYHUVLRQ7DEOHV
([DPSOH6HFXULWLHV
6$3 'DWDSURYLGHU
6HFXULW\SULFHW\SH ([WHUQDOVHFXULW\SULFHW\SH
&ORVLQJSULFH &/26(

(QWHU )LOODXWRPDWLFDOO\
PDQXDOO\
!<1k(( (/(!!( 6<e (
 SAP AG 2001

For each data provider, you must make the settings for converting the following codes used by the SAP
System into the codes used by the data provider:
y Currencies (exchange rate types)
y Securities (security price types)
y Volatilities (volatility types)
y Indexes (index types)

To make the conversion settings, ask your data provider how the names you have defined in your SAP
system are defined externally, in other words, what the related instrument properties are called.
© SAP AG FSC110 10-20

'DWDIHHG7UDQVODWLRQ7DEOH
([DPSOH6HFXULWLHV
6$3 'DWDSURYLGHU
6HFXULW\SULFHW\SH &/26(
6HFXULW\,'QR
)6$*
([FKDQJH

(QWHU
)LOODXWRPDWLFDOO\
k( -A1 ¡¢£ ¡ ¤ ¥17_ ((
PDQXDOO\
(= copy master data)
 SAP AG 2001

The translation table links the SAP notation for the market data to the corresponding datafeed notations
used by the external partner program.
The SAP notation can be derived automatically from the existing master data.
You must enter the datafeed notation and any additional information manually.

If you have already defined conversion codes, and fill the translation table automatically, the system
converts the corresponding data and enters the instrument property in datafeed notation as the default
value in the translation table. Defining the conversion codes beforehand saves you from having to
maintain the translation table manually.
© SAP AG FSC110 10-21

)LOO7UDQVODWLRQ7DEOH$XWRPDWLFDOO\
&RS\0DVWHU'DWD
6HOHFWPDVWHUGDWD
&XUUHQFLHV
6HFXULWLHV
,QWHUHVWUDWHV
,QGH[HV
'DWDIHHG
1DPH %5,'*(
6HOHFWLRQ
VWNH\GHILQLWLRQ WR
QGNH\GHILQLWLRQ WR
 SAP AG 2001

© SAP AG FSC110 10-22

0DLQWDLQ7UDQVODWLRQ7DEOH6HFXULWLHV
,QVWUFODVV
Security Exchange RT Datafeed Instrument

0000000716460 FRANKFURT 01 BRIDGE =FSAG
0000000716460 FRANKFURT 05 BRIDGE =FSAG
0000000716460 XETRA 01 BRIDGE LQSAG
0000000716460 XETRA 05 BRIDGE LQSAG
0000000716463 FRANKFURT 01 BRIDGE =FSAG3
0000000716463 FRANKFURT 05 BRIDGE =FSAG3
0000000716463 XETRA 01 BRIDGE LQSAG3
0000000716463 XETRA 05 BRIDGE LQSAG3
0000000804010 XETRA 01 BRIDGE LQDBK
0000000815510 FRANKFURT 01 BRIDGE =KCKST
0000000815510 XETRA 01 BRIDGE LQCKST
0000000815512 FRANKFURT 01 BRIDGE =FCKSV
0000000815512 XETRA 01 BRIDGE LQCKSV
 SAP AG 2001

In the translation table you maintain the external datafeed notations and all the necessary parameters for
the data provider.
Example:
y SAP notation:
- Security name: 716463 (SAP)
- Exchange: Frankfurt
- Rate type: 05
y Datafeed notation (example for Dow Jones, October 2001):
- Instrument name: =FSAP3
- Data source: QFRecord
- Instrument property: CLOSE

In the detail screen, you can set an indicator for each class to determine whether the user should have the
option of saving the imported security prices permanently. If this is the case, the user can set an indicator
in the application to actually save the updated values.
(This save option is available for all types of datafeed data.)
© SAP AG FSC110 10-23

,PSRUW6HFXULWLHV,QIRUPDWLRQIURP'DWDIHHG
3URYLGHU
'DWDIHHG
1DPH %5,'*(
'DWDIHHGSURYLGHUILOHWREHLPSRUWHG
)LOHQDPH XVUVDSWUDQVWPSJHUPDQ\
6HFXULWLHVVHOHFWLRQ
6HFXULW\QDPH WR
([FKDQJH WR
1DPHVIRUVHFXULW\SULFHW\SH
5QDPH
'DWDIHHGQDPH &/26(
 SAP AG 2001

,PSRUW6HFXULWLHV,QIRUPDWLRQIURP'DWDIHHG3URYLGHU
If the datafeed provider supports this function, you can import a file for each security price you request,
which automatically translates the SAP notation into the datafeed notation in the translation table and
adds the relevant datafeed parameters.
Prerequisites: You must use the same name in the security class data in the SAP System as the datafeed
provider uses, and the datafeed provider must make an input file available.
© SAP AG FSC110 10-24

&KHFN7UDQVODWLRQ7DEOH
'DWDIHHG
1DPH %5,'*(
0DUNHWGDWDVHOHFWLRQ
,QVWUXPHQWFODVV 02 WR
VWNH\GHILQLWLRQ 0000000716460 WR 0000000716463
QGNH\GHILQLWLRQ FRANKFURT WR
 SAP AG 2001

This report checks whether the translation table is fully configured. Incorrect and incomplete entries are
displayed in an error list.
© SAP AG FSC110 10-25

)LOH,QWHUIDFH'DWDIHHG0DUNHW'DWD0RQLWRULQJ
¦1§ ¨p©© ª¬«p®}«a¯°

±6² ³
±´ ³
±pµ ³
±¶ ³
µ6² ³
µpµ ³
 SAP AG 2001

You can define a maximum tolerance limit for price deviations per instrument class. When you import
market data, the system checks whether the price deviations fall within these limits. If the difference
between the new price and the most recently imported price exceeds the defined range, the error log
contains a warning message. This allows you to identify incorrect prices, which you can then adjust
manually.
© SAP AG FSC110 10-26

0DUNHW'DWD0DQDJHPHQW8QLW6XPPDU\
z <RXDUHQRZIDPLOLDUZLWKWKHYDULRXVRSWLRQV
IRUPDQDJLQJPDUNHWGDWDLQWKH6$36\VWHP
z %\FRQILJXULQJWKHGDWDIHHGLQWHUIDFH\RXFDQ
LPSRUWH[WHUQDOPDUNHWGDWDWRWKH6$3V\VWHP
XSRQUHTXHVW
 SAP AG 2001

© SAP AG FSC110 10-27

,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
&RQWHQWV
z Overview of reporting options

z Standard reports
 SAP AG 2001


,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP8QLW2EMHFWLYHV
WR
z Describe the various reporting options in SAP CFM
 SAP AG 2001


2UJDQL]DWLRQDO8QLWV
%XVLQHVV3DUWQHUV
%DQNV
,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
 SAP AG 2001


,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP%XVLQHVV6FHQDULR
z <RXKDYHFUHDWHGYDULRXVWUDQVDFWLRQVLQ
WKH6$35&)0DSSOLFDWLRQVDQGQRZZDQW
WRJDLQDQRYHUYLHZRIWKHUHSRUWLQJRSWLRQV
&)0RIIHUVLQFOXGLQJGULOOGRZQUHSRUWLQJ
 SAP AG 2001


,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP2YHUYLHZ
5HSRUWVGHOLYHUHG 8VHUGHILQHG
E\6$3 UHSRUWV
&XPXODWLYHYDOXHV 1RQFXPXODWLYHYDOXHV
 SAP AG 2001

In addition to using the reports delivered by SAP, you can define your own evaluations in the
Information System.

6WUXFWXUHRIWKH,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
([DPSOH-RXUQDO
$FFRXQWLQJ
&)0
7UDQVDFWLRQ0DQDJHU
0RQH\0DUNHW
,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP $UHDVSHFLILFMRXUQDO
7UDQVDFWLRQ
7UDQVDFWLRQ2YHUYLHZ
0RQH\0DUNHW-RXUQDO
,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP
5HSRUWV
&URVVDSSOLFDWLRQMRXUQDO
6WUDWHJLF
2SHUDWLYH
7UDQVDFWLRQ
7UDQVDFWLRQ2YHUYLHZ
-RXUQDO00);'HULYDWLYHV6HFXULWLHV
 SAP AG 2001

The 5HSRUWVsection of the menu contains an overview of all the CFM reports
You find the cross-CFM reports under the menu option 6WUDWHJLF These include reports from Cash
Management for analyzing liquidity, reports from the limit management and market risk areas for
controlling risk, and cross-CFM reports for analyzing your positions and revenues.
The 2SHUDWLYH section contains detailed evaluations to support your day-to-day activities
The CFM-wide reports contain the information from the area-specific reports in an aggregated form.
The reporting tree displays a complete directory of all reports defined in CFM that can be assigned to
users. You can assign reports, like transactions, to specific users (role-specific).

0RQH\0DUNHW-RXUQDO
2YHUYLHZOLVWRI0RQH\0DUNHWWUDQVDFWLRQV
,QIRUPDWLRQRQ
Company code 1000 IDES AG Ent./Changed on 09/06/YYYY

Product type 51A Fixed-term deposit Transaction type 100 Investment
Transaction Counterparty Portfolio Fin. project Trader OutConf. IncomConf. ContDate Chgd/Entd on
Act. categ. Status Curr. Amount StartTerm StartRoll. EndTerm Int. rate Valid since Chgd/Entrd
1 1000 Deutsche Bank 1 required 1 required 09/06/YYYY 09/06/YYYY
Contract Active UNI 100,000.00 09/06/YYYY 11/06/YYYY 2.5 09/06/YYYY BAUERT
Company code 1000 IDES AG Ent./Changed on 09/06/YYYY

Product type 52A Deposit at notice Transaction type 100 Investment
Transaction Counterparty Portfolio Fin. project Trader OutConf. IncomConf. ContDate Chgd/Entd on
Act. categ. Status Curr. Amount StartTerm StartRoll. Int. rate Valid since Chgd/Entrd
3 1000 Deutsche Bank 1 required 1 required 09/06/YYYY 09/06/YYYY
Contract Active UNI 100,000.00 09/06/YYYY 2.6 09/06/YYYY BAUERT
 SAP AG 2002

The 0RQH\0DUNHW-RXUQDOenables you to call up an overview of the money market transactions

stored in the system using various selection criteria. For each selection, you can define selection options
(single values or ranges, incl./excl.).
Example: You can use the journal to select transactions concluded by certain traders or with certain
business partners.

3D\PHQW6FKHGXOH
$UHDVSHFLILFSD\PHQWVFKHGXOH &URVVDSSOLFDWLRQSD\PHQWVFKHGXOH
3D\PHQWVFKHGXOH
3D\PHQWVFKHGXOH
0RQH\0DUNHW)RUH[
0RQH\0DUNHW
'HULYDWLYHV6HFXULWLHV

!"
#$#%&
(')#
*
(+ )

,#%! &#
*
$+ )-%
.!*(+/0*"
$**1+ 02#3
*
45
6768 9;:)*<
6<
6=
,!9,:)*><
6
?45
6768 9;<*+ **@
#A$#,<
6<*+ **
#A$#5<
6

!
B/B B
 SAP AG 2001

The payment schedule displays the incoming and outgoing payments for a specified period.
The payment schedule is now linked to the flexible SAP List Viewer, which enables you to:
y Define and save your own display variants
y Sort by any field
y Set filters
y Set up group totals
The payment amounts for a payment date are added together automatically, provided all the amounts for
this date are in one currency. The layout of the payment schedule is flexible. You can have a maximum
width of 255 characters, define new column characteristics, or delete existing ones.

0RQH\0DUNHW3RVLWLRQ/LVW
CoCd Trans. PrC TCat PTypTTypPartner TCurr. Amount Int. rate StartTerm EndTerm ...
1000 1 510 100 51A 100 1000 UNI 100,000 2.5 09/06/YYYY 11/06/YYYY
1000 3 520 100 52A 100 1000 UNI 100,000 2.5 09/06/YYYY
1000 4 510 100 51A 100 1000 UNI 100,000 2.7 09/07/YYYY 11/07/YYYY
&RQQHFWLRQWRWKH6$3/LVW9LHZHU
 SAP AG 2001

By listing transaction types sorted by conditions you can use the position list to monitor the performance
of traders or business partners. The positions for money market transactions are displayed in the position
list for specific key dates.
You can also select money market transactions concluded as of a certain date, or transactions due by a
certain date.
The connection to the SAP List Viewer gives you a range of options for generating lists, including
flexible settings for the row/column layout, sorting data and list totals. You can save these as display
variants and use them later.

'ULOOGRZQ5HSRUWLQJ3ULQFLSOH
zDVDGULOOGRZQUHSRUW
%21' zDVDOLVWOLVWYLHZHU

'DWD G C E H D F&
E F C HJO E I K L M N O H V H O S T D N U S X G D EH E D W O S D O D F D P
3RUWIROLR
K P L K N M PQ Q KR P L M Y K M Y LZ M [
RXWSXW
00 zDVDJUDSKLF
);

-3<

86'
)/225 (85
&$3 &XUUHQF\
)5$
3URGXFWW\SH
 SAP AG 2001

The drilldown reporting tool enables you to set up your own reports and process them interactively.
Drilldown reporting is highly flexible: You can analyze the results graphically, transfer them to PC
applications, link reports, and assign them to a hierarchical tree structure.
Drilldown reports allow you to generate different views of your existing data. You do this by selecting
the appropriate combination of characteristics and key figures.
The idea behind drilldown reporting is to make the information available in a cube with n-dimensions.
Each sub-cube is specified by characteristics. The characteristics correspond to the dimensions (for
example, 3 characteristics: portfolio, product type, and currency).
Each sub-cube contains n key figures (example: 2 key figures: investment/purchase, borrowing/sale).
You can generate different views by linking the characteristics and key figures and combining the
corresponding values.
© SAP AG FSC110 11-10

'ULOOGRZQ5HSRUWLQJ$UFKLWHFWXUH
.H\ILJXUHV &KDUDFWHULVWLFV
)RUPV
5HSRUW
&UHDWH
&KDQJH
5HSRUW VDYH ([HFXWH
LQGH[ %DWFK
OLVW
/LVWV
VDYH *UDSKLFV
1DYLJDWLRQ
'ULOOGRZQ
:LQZRUG 0DLO ([FHO
 SAP AG 2001

You can use characteristics, key figures, and forms to define reports. A report compiles a number of lists
that you can access interactively and display on your screen. You can also print reports, export them to
MS Word or Excel, or save them to a file.
Forms define the content and format of reports. They are used as preconfigured templates when you
define the reports themselves.
Characteristics define the different ways in which the dataset can be classified, for example, by company
code, business partner, portfolio. You can include characteristics both in forms and reports.
Key figures can be amounts and quantities; you can use a key figure transaction to define additional key
figures from existing key figures (key figure tree).
You can select key figures in forms or in reports.
Note: For more detailed information, see the general documentation on drilldown reporting.
© SAP AG FSC110 11-11

)XQFWLRQVRI'ULOOGRZQ5HSRUWLQJ
z 1DYLJDWLRQWRDOOOHYHOVFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
z ([FHSWLRQUHSRUWLQJSURYLGHVDYLVXDOZDUQLQJZKHQ
FULWLFDOYDOXHVGHYLDWHIURPH[SHFWDWLRQV
z +LHUDUFK\SURFHVVLQJVKRZVH[WHUQDOKLHUDUFKLHV
VXFKDVIORZW\SHKLHUDUFK\
z *UDSKLFVLPSURYHYLVXDOL]DWLRQRIWKHILJXUHV
z $QDO\VLVIXQFWLRQVDOORZ\RXWRFODVVLI\\RXUGDWD
z 'DWDPLQLQJHQDEOHV\RXWRLGHQWLI\FRQVSLFXRXVYDOXHV
LQWKHGDWDVHWDXWRPDWLFDOO\
z &XUUHQF\WUDQVODWLRQGHWHUPLQHVFXUUHQF\LQIOXHQFHV
 SAP AG 2001

© SAP AG FSC110 11-12

)RUP5HSRUW
z )RUPUHSRUW
For reports prepared individually with
\
Form-based layout
\
Specific formatting (colors, etc.)
\
Integration of variables
\
Complex selection
 SAP AG 2001

Simple tools are available for generating simple reports, while more sophisticated tools are available
when you need to generate more complex reports.
In the CFM area, you create form reports. These are reports based on forms and are suitable for printing
reports.
Drilldown reporting is always related to the business objects of an application.
Features of reports:
y Complex structures, which comprise many subcomponents
y Language-dependent, reports can therefore be translated
y Reports can be transported and delivered
y Reports contain authorization checks and can therefore be blocked for specific users.
It is now possible to define "%DVLFUHSRUWV", for which you do not need to create forms.
© SAP AG FSC110 11-13

'ULOOGRZQ5HSRUWLQJ2YHUYLHZ
z &UHDWHIRUP 7UDQVDFWLRQPDQDJHPHQW
$SSOLFDWLRQ&XVWRPL]LQJ
z &UHDWHUHSRUWV 7UDQVDFWLRQPDQDJHPHQW
$SSOLFDWLRQ&XVWRPL]LQJ
z /LQNUHSRUWWRUHSRUWWUHH 7UDQVDFWLRQPDQDJHPHQW
&XVWRPL]LQJ
z ([HFXWHUHSRUW 7UDQVDFWLRQPDQDJHPHQW
$SSOLFDWLRQ
 SAP AG 2001

© SAP AG FSC110 11-14

,QIRUPDWLRQ6\VWHP8QLW6XPPDU\
z 7KHUHSRUWLQJIXQFWLRQVSURYLGH\RXZLWK
DGGLWLRQDORSWLRQVIRUPRQLWRULQJDQG
HYDOXDWLQJILQDQFLDOWUDQVDFWLRQVLQ6$3
7UHDVXU\0DQDJHPHQW
z 7KHGULOOGRZQUHSRUWLQJWRROLQSDUWLFXODU
RIIHUVDKLJKGHJUHHRIIOH[LELOLW\IRUHYDOXDWLQJ
\RXUWUDQVDFWLRQV
 SAP AG 2001

© SAP AG FSC110 11-15

SAP Treasury - Risk Management

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

SAP Treasury - Risk Management

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

)6&Basic functions of 6$37UHDVXU\DQG5LVN

?!H<C q @ =9 2 AB? C ? @<=9 2

 )6&Overview of SAP Financial Supply Management

© SAP AG FSC110 1-1

© SAP AG FSC110 1-2

z Create and configure banks and business partners

© SAP AG FSC110 1-3

Unit 1 &RXUVH2YHUYLHZ Unit 7 7UDQVDFWLRQDQG3RVLWLRQ

© SAP AG FSC110 1-4

© SAP AG FSC110 1-5

z You are using (or have successfully installed) the

© SAP AG FSC110 1-6

© SAP AG FSC110 2-1

z Provide an overview of SAP Corporate Finance

z State the relevant product types

z Explain the various processes, standard functions

© SAP AG FSC110 2-2

© SAP AG FSC110 2-3

z Before you begin working in the project team, you

© SAP AG FSC110 2-4

The aim of SAP &RUSRUDWH)LQDQFH0DQDJHPHQW(&)0) is to support finance divisions in a wide range

© SAP AG FSC110 2-5

© SAP AG FSC110 2-6

© SAP AG FSC110 2-7

© SAP AG FSC110 2-8

© SAP AG FSC110 2-9

© SAP AG FSC110 2-10

d*K !K " bAc R['+.\F]^P._4A"(&;,#9J,J\3"K '+`

© SAP AG FSC110 2-11

¨i ii i©( W¡ Á ;  <O  W

³^F´Oµ1'+P#9J4R¶,<9*e dK ¿CP*K _+K "S2a%] ,#4&

ª «¬ ¬¯ ­;® ª «¬ ¬ ¯ ­;® ª «¬ ¬¯ ­;®

© SAP AG FSC110 2-12

0RQH\PDUNHW 6HFXULWLHV )RUH[ 'HULYDWLYHV

© SAP AG FSC110 2-13

© SAP AG FSC110 2-14

7UDGLQJ %DFNRIILFH $FFRXQWLQJ

Æ &UHDWHQHZRIIHU Æ 6HWWOHPHQWFRQWURO Æ 3RVWLQJV

© SAP AG FSC110 2-15

© SAP AG FSC110 2-16

© SAP AG FSC110 2-17

z Corporate Finance Management covers the components

© SAP AG FSC110 2-18

G/L accounts 113100, 113105, 113113 113100, 113105, 113113

Notes on the exercises:

© SAP AG FSC110 2-19

You want to gain an overview of the SAP Corporate Finance

1-1 Log on to the system with your user TREA-XX.

XX = your group number = your PC number

1-3 Familiarize yourself with the structure of the &XVWRPL]LQJsettings.

© SAP AG FSC110 2-20

1-2 Overview of the various functions

1-3 Overview of Customizing

© SAP AG FSC110 2-21

© SAP AG FSC110 3-1

z Explain the relationship between the Customizing

z Configure trader and user data

© SAP AG FSC110 3-2

© SAP AG FSC110 3-3

© SAP AG FSC110 3-4

© SAP AG FSC110 3-5

© SAP AG FSC110 3-6

© SAP AG FSC110 3-7

)6&Basic functions of 6$37UHDVXU\DQG5LVN

?!H<C q @ =9 2 AB? C ? @<=9 2

)6&Overview of SAP Financial Supply Management

d*K !K " bAc R['+.\F]^P._4A"(&;,#9J,J\3"K '+`

¨i ii i©( W¡ Á ; <O W

³^F´Oµ1'+P#9J4R¶,<9e dK ¿CPK _+K "S2a%] ,#4&

ª «¬ ¬¯ ;® ª «¬ ¬¯ ;® ª «¬ ¬¯ ;®

Æ &UHDWHQHZRIIHU Æ 6HWWOHPHQWFRQWURO Æ 3RVWLQJV

z <RXFDQHQWHUFRPSDQ\VSHFLILF Î ([WHQVLELOLW\VXSSRUWHGLQIXWXUH

75 &)0SDUWQHULQW

1R )UQR 7RQR &XUUQR ([W

() *,+) - /./ 01

QP + R>BS TBUQ

$FW6KRUWWH[W %3UROH 1DPH

)OGJU +LGH 5HTXLUHG 2SWILHOG 'LVSOD\

0 I

z &DQEHDUFKLYHGDORQJZLWKWKHVWDQGLQJLQVWUXFWLRQVXVLQJ

£ ¥ §* £

¡ §I ¢ ¨±

Release %DQNLQJ&)0introduced Phase I of the business partner conversion process. In this

© ¢ · ¶B¸/¹¢IT¡ £ ¥ §I £ TB)©ª«¬º >/)©Qª¬

To use a business partner (BP), you have to: